JP5918883B2 - Slot machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a slot machine capable of generating a predetermined winning according to a display result of a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each identifiable.

  As this type of slot machine, those described in the following Patent Documents 1 and 2 have been proposed.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-117076 JP 2006-198196 A

  An object of the present invention is to provide a slot machine that can prevent a player from forgetting that a setting value has been changed.

In order to solve the above-described problem, a slot machine according to claim 1 of the present invention provides:
Provided with a variable display section on which a plurality of types of identification information each can be identified,
When the gaming value is used to set the number of bets, the variable display unit can be changed, and after changing the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the change of the variable display unit. In a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result,
Before the display result is derived, multiple types of prizes including special prizes with transition to special gaming state, small prizes with game value addition, and re-game prizes with replay A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow occurrence of
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation procedure of the derivation operation means;
Special decision carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of the special prize after the next game when it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated and the special prize is not generated based on the determination. When,
Special gaming state control means for controlling to the special gaming state when a special display result for generating the special prize is derived as the display result;
Game value giving means for giving a predetermined number of game values to a player when a small combination display result in which the small combination winning is generated as the display result;
An operation procedure notifying means for notifying that an operation procedure advantageous to a player can be specified according to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determining means is a specified result that allows the occurrence of the small part winning. When,
A stepping motor for variably displaying the variable display unit by exciting in a predetermined order with respect to a plurality of excitation phases arranged so as to surround a rotor incorporating a permanent magnet;
Fluctuation control means for performing fluctuation control for variably displaying the variable display unit by exciting the plurality of excitation phases of the stepping motor in a predetermined order;
It has a storage area for storing data for controlling games including excitation phase data, which is data related to the excitation phase, so that it can be read and written, and even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, Data storage means capable of holding stored data;
A setting value setting means for selecting and setting one of setting values from a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player based on the operation of the setting operation means;
A setting time initialization means for initializing data stored in the data storage means when a new setting value is set by the setting value setting means based on an operation of the setting operation means;
A set value suggesting effect executing means capable of executing a set value suggesting effect indicating the set value set by the set value setting means;
With
The data storage means stores, in the storage area, data indicating a stop phase that is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the variation of the variable display section stops.
The data initialized by the setting initialization means does not include the excitation phase data,
The fluctuation control means performs the fluctuation control based on the excitation phase data stored in the data storage means when the data storage means is initialized by the setting time initialization means,
In the state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the special decision carry-over means, the occurrence of the replay prize is generated more than the state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over The expected value of the number of gaming values given by the gaming value granting unit per game is notified when the operating procedure can be specified by the operating procedure reporting unit. When the derivation operation means is operated according to the operation procedure, the number is greater than the number of gaming values used for setting the bet amount, and when the operation procedure is not identifiable by the operation procedure notification means, Less than the number of gaming values used to set bets,
The set value suggesting effect includes a specific set value suggesting effect that is executed only when a specific set value is set.

The slot machine according to means 1 of the present invention is:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified are arranged. ), The display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result of the variable display device ( Slot machine 1)
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (activation when only the setting key switch 37 is ON), any one of the allowable stages (setting values) having different advantages for the player is allowed. An allowable stage setting means for selecting and setting a stage (set value);
Settable state control means for controlling the allowable stage to a settable state that can be set by the allowable stage setting means;
Stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) for rotating the reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) by exciting the plurality of excitation phases (φ1-φ4) in a predetermined order;
Drive control means for controlling drive of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R);
An external output terminal for outputting an external output signal;
Read out data for controlling the game including data (stop phase data) indicating a stop phase that is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) when the reel is stopped; A data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data in a writable manner and capable of holding data stored in the storage area even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped;
Drive start means for starting the rotation of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) based on data indicating the stop phase (stop phase data) stored in the data storage means (RAM 41c);
A setting time initialization unit that initializes data stored in the data storage unit (RAM 41c) based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation unit (starting when only the setting key switch 37 is ON);
When the data is initialized by the setting initialization means, data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at a predetermined initial position among the plurality of excitation phases (φ1 to φ4) is data indicating the stop phase. Initial excitation phase setting means for setting (clearing stop phase data) in the data storage means (RAM 41c) as (stop phase data);
After the initial excitation phase setting means sets data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at the initial position in the data storage means (RAM 41c), an initial stage for exciting the excitation phase at the initial position before the game can be started. Excitation means;
An abnormality determining means for determining whether an abnormality has occurred in the slot machine;
The occurrence of the abnormality is determined based on a setting in-progress signal indicating that the settable state is controlled by the settable state control unit, and the abnormality determination unit determines that an abnormality has occurred in the slot machine. An external output control means for performing control for outputting an abnormal signal indicating as the external output signal;
A signal conversion means for outputting the in-setting signal and the abnormal signal output from the external output control means from the same external output terminal;
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, even when the data stored in the data storage means is initialized in accordance with an operation of a predetermined installation operation means, that is, an operation for setting a new allowable stage, excitation of the initial position is performed. After the data indicating the phase is set in the data storage means as the data indicating the stop phase, the excitation phase at the initial position is excited before the game can be started. The excitation phase indicated by the set data matches, and when the reel is rotated in the first game after changing the allowable stage, the actual excitation phase of the stepping motor and the data storage means are set. Since the stepping motor can be started in the state where the excitation phase indicated by the data matches, the first step after the change operation of the allowable stage is performed. Without reel ends up vibrating in rotating Le, that allowed steps from the player will be Minuka that have been changed can be prevented.

Note that the predetermined number of bets in the means 1 is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or a maximum bet number. Anyway. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
In addition, the data indicating the excitation phase of the stepping motor and the data indicating the excitation phase at a predetermined initial position in the means 1 may be data indicating the excitation phase itself, the number of steps of the stepping motor, etc. Data that can specify the excitation phase from the data may be used.
Further, in the means 1, when the setting time initialization means initializes the data stored in the data storage means based on the operation of the predetermined setting operation means, the predetermined setting operation means is operated. The data stored in the data storage means is initialized before a new allowable stage is set, or the predetermined setting operation means is operated, and the data is set after a new allowable stage is set. Either initialization of data stored in the storage means may be used.

The slot machine according to means 2 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 1,
An excitation continuation means for continuing the excitation state of the excitation phase excited when the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is stopped after the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is stopped;
Excitation cancellation means for canceling the excitation state that has continued since the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) has stopped after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) has stopped; ,
It is characterized by having.
According to this feature, the excited state continues even after the reel stops, so that the symbols placed on the reel will not be displaced, and the excited state is released after a predetermined time has passed since the reel stopped. Therefore, no load is applied to the components constituting the stepping motor, so that the degradation of the components can be prevented.
Note that after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped, for example, after the reels stopped, a state in which no game progress operation has been performed for a certain period of time continues to enter the demo state (standby state). It is preferable that the timing after the time when it is assumed that the player has finished or interrupted the game has passed, and by using such timing, the reel can be used while the player is playing. While it is possible to maintain a state in which the arranged symbols are not easily displaced, it is possible to reduce the load on the component parts of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

The slot machine according to means 3 of the present invention is:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified are arranged. ), The display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result of the variable display device ( Slot machine 1)
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (activation when only the setting key switch 37 is ON), any one of the allowable stages (setting values) having different advantages for the player is allowed. An allowable stage setting means for selecting and setting a stage (set value);
Stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) for rotating the reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) by exciting the plurality of excitation phases (φ1-φ4) in a predetermined order;
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game including drive control of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
With
The game control means includes
A microcomputer (main CPU 41a) constituting the game control means (main control unit 41) including data (stop phase data) indicating the excitation phase of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) is operated. Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding the data stored in the storage area even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped ,
Drive start means for starting the rotation of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) based on data (stop phase data) indicating the excitation phase stored in the data storage means (RAM 41c);
A setting time initialization unit that initializes data stored in the data storage unit (RAM 41c) based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation unit (starting when only the setting key switch 37 is ON);
When the data is initialized by the setting initialization means, data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at a predetermined initial position among the plurality of excitation phases (φ1 to φ4) is data indicating the excitation phase. Initial excitation phase setting means for setting (clearing stop phase data) in the data storage means (RAM 41c) as (stop phase data);
After the initial excitation phase setting means sets data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at the initial position in the data storage means (RAM 41c), it is set in the data storage means (RAM 41c) before the game can be started. Initial excitation means for exciting the excitation phase indicated by the data,
Timing start means for starting timing based on the fact that a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game is satisfied (reel rotation start);
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Derivation control means for performing control for causing the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to derive a display result based on a determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery);
When a specific display result (RT transition outcome) is derived as the display result of the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R), a specific gaming state (RT (2) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state )) To control the specific gaming state,
Including
The derivation control means includes
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a stage before a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the time measuring means starts measuring time, the predetermining means (internal An operation time derivation control means for performing a control for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the lottery),
Regardless of whether or not the advance determination means (internal lottery) has decided to allow the generation of a prize when the automatic derivation time has elapsed after the timing means has started timing, it corresponds to winning a prize Automatic derivation control means for performing control for deriving a non-winning display result (display mode in which no winning is established);
Including
The operation time derivation control means derives display results other than the specific display result (RT transition outcome) regardless of the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery),
The automatic derivation control unit is configured to display the specific display as the non-winning display result on the condition that the generation of the specific winning (replay (2)) is determined by the prior determination unit (internal lottery). It is characterized by deriving the result (RT transition outcome).
According to this feature, in order to generate a winning, it is necessary to operate the derivation operation means, while the specific display result accompanied by the transition to the specific gaming state is automatically derived without operating the derivation operation means. It is necessary to wait for the time to elapse and automatically derive the display result. In addition, since the specific display result is derived on the condition that it is determined that the generation of the specific winning is permitted, the player considers whether the generation of the specific winning is permitted, It is possible to select whether the display result is derived by operating the derivation operation means, or whether the display result is automatically derived without operating the derivation operation means, and the game can be sharpened.
Also, the data stored in the data storage means is initialized in order to initialize the control state of the game control means in accordance with the operation of the predetermined installation operation means, that is, the operation for setting a new allowable stage. Even when the data is set, the data indicating the excitation phase at the initial position is set in the data storage means as the data indicating the excitation phase, and then the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means is excited before the game can be started. As a result, the excitation phase of the actual stepping motor and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means coincide with each other, and when the reel is rotated in the first game after performing the change operation of the allowable stage. The driving of the stepping motor is started in a state where the actual excitation phase of the stepping motor matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means. After the operation to change the allowable level, the reel will not vibrate when the reel is first rotated, and the allowable level has been changed by the player due to an event other than the allowable level suggestion effect. Can be prevented from being overlooked.

The slot machine according to means 4 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 3,
The game control means (main control unit 41) performs a determination that the prior determination means (internal lottery) allows the generation of the specific winning (replay (2)) with a higher probability than the normal gaming state. It is characterized by including a specific winning high probability gaming state control means for controlling to a winning high probability gaming state (RT (1)).
According to this feature, the probability that a specific display result can be derived varies depending on whether it is a normal gaming state or a specific winning high probability gaming state. You can turn it on.

The slot machine according to means 5 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 3 or 4,
The variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified,
When a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R), one game is finished, and the display of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is displayed). A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in (Area),
The automatic derivation control means is configured to perform the automatic derivation after the timing means starts timing in a state where display results are not yet derived in all of the plurality of variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R). The specific display result (RT transition output) is derived on the condition that time has elapsed.
According to this feature, if any one of the plurality of variable display areas is in a state where the display result is derived by the operation of the deriving operation means, for example, it is determined that the occurrence of a specific winning is permitted. Even if the other variable display area is automatically derived regardless of the operation of the derivation operation means, the specific display result is not derived, so the display derived by the operation of the derivation operation means It can be prevented from determining whether a specific display result can be derived from the result.

The slot machine according to means 6 of the present invention is:
A game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) each having a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified are arranged. ), The display result is derived and displayed on a variable display device that can be displayed in a variable manner, so that one game is completed, and a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result of the variable display device ( Slot machine 1)
Based on an operation of a predetermined setting operation means (activation when only the setting key switch 37 is ON), any one of the allowable stages (setting values) having different advantages for the player is allowed. An allowable stage setting means for selecting and setting a stage (set value);
Stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) for rotating the reels (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) by exciting the plurality of excitation phases (φ1-φ4) in a predetermined order;
Game control means (main control unit 41) for controlling the progress of the game including drive control of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R);
Derivation operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) operated when deriving display results from the variable display devices (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
With
The game control means includes
A microcomputer (main CPU 41a) constituting the game control means (main control unit 41) including data (stop phase data) indicating the excitation phase of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) is operated. Data storage means (RAM 41c) having a storage area for storing data so as to be readable and writable, and capable of holding the data stored in the storage area even when power supply to the slot machine is stopped ,
Drive start means for starting the rotation of the stepping motors (reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R) based on data (stop phase data) indicating the excitation phase stored in the data storage means (RAM 41c);
A setting time initialization unit that initializes data stored in the data storage unit (RAM 41c) based on an operation of the predetermined setting operation unit (starting when only the setting key switch 37 is ON);
When the data is initialized by the setting initialization means, data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at a predetermined initial position among the plurality of excitation phases (φ1 to φ4) is data indicating the excitation phase. Initial excitation phase setting means for setting (clearing stop phase data) in the data storage means (RAM 41c) as (stop phase data);
After the initial excitation phase setting means sets data indicating the excitation phase (φ1) at the initial position in the data storage means (RAM 41c), it is set in the data storage means (RAM 41c) before the game can be started. Initial excitation means for exciting the excitation phase indicated by the data,
Timing start means for starting timing based on the fact that a predetermined timing start condition after the start of the game is satisfied (reel rotation start);
A pre-determining means (internal lottery) for determining whether or not a winning is allowed before a display result is derived on the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R);
Derivation control means for performing control for causing the variable display device (reels 2L, 2C, 2R) to derive a display result based on a determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery);
Specific game state control means for controlling to a specific game state (RT (2)) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state;
Specific game state ending means for ending the specific game state (RT (2)) when a specific winning (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) occurs in the specific game state (RT (2));
Including
The derivation control means includes
When the deriving operation means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated at a stage before a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the time measuring means starts measuring time, the predetermining means (internal An operation time derivation control means for performing a control for deriving a display result according to the determination result of the lottery),
Regardless of whether or not the advance determination means (internal lottery) has decided to allow the generation of a prize when the automatic derivation time has elapsed after the timing means has started timing, it corresponds to winning a prize Automatic derivation control means for performing control for deriving a non-winning display result (display mode in which no winning is established);
Including
The automatic derivation control means displays the non-winning display even when it is determined by the prior decision means (internal lottery) that the specific winning (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is allowed to occur. It is characterized by deriving the result (display mode in which no winnings are established).
According to this feature, in order to generate a winning, it is necessary to operate the derivation operation means, while in the specific gaming state, it is determined that the generation of the specific winning as an end condition of the specific gaming state is permitted. In such a case, it is possible to avoid the end of the specific gaming state by automatically deriving the display result after waiting for the automatic derivation time to elapse without operating the derivation operation means. For this reason, in consideration of whether or not a specific winning is permitted in a specific gaming state, the player operates the derivation operation means to derive a display result or automatically operates the derivation operation means without operating the derivation operation means. It is possible to select whether to derive the display result automatically, so that the game can be sharpened.
Also, the data stored in the data storage means is initialized in order to initialize the control state of the game control means in accordance with the operation of the predetermined installation operation means, that is, the operation for setting a new allowable stage. Even when the data is set, the data indicating the excitation phase at the initial position is set in the data storage means as the data indicating the excitation phase, and then the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means is excited before the game can be started. As a result, the excitation phase of the actual stepping motor and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means coincide with each other, and when the reel is rotated in the first game after performing the change operation of the allowable stage. The driving of the stepping motor is started in a state where the actual excitation phase of the stepping motor matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the data storage means. After the operation to change the allowable level, the reel will not vibrate when the reel is first rotated, and the allowable level has been changed by the player due to an event other than the allowable level suggestion effect. Can be prevented from being overlooked.

In the means 3 and 6, the predetermined number of bets is at least one bet number, and a game can be started by setting a bet number of two or more or a maximum bet number. You may make it become. Further, the game may be started by setting a bet amount determined according to a plurality of game states.
Further, the data indicating the excitation phase of the stepping motor and the data indicating the excitation phase at the predetermined initial position in the means 3 and 6 may be data indicating the excitation phase itself, or the number of steps of the stepping motor. For example, the data may make it possible to specify the excitation phase from the data.
In the means 3 and 6, the setting time initialization means initializes the data stored in the data storage means based on the operation of the predetermined setting operation means. After the initial setting of the data stored in the data storage means before the new allowable stage is set, or after the predetermined setting operation means is operated and the new allowable stage is set. It may be any of initializing data stored in the data storage means.
In addition, the predetermined timing start condition for the timing means to start timing in the means 3 and 6 may be a condition that is satisfied after the start of the game. For example, when a game start operation is performed, the variable display device When the change starts, when the operation of the derivation operation means becomes effective after the start of the change of the variable display device, and the variable display device is composed of a plurality of variable display regions. When the derivation operation means can be individually derived, when the operation of the derivation operation means invalidated by the derivation operation becomes valid again, the derivation operation means is last operated. There may be.
In the means 3 and 6, the automatic derivation control means performs control for deriving a non-winning display result that does not correspond to winning when the automatic stop time has elapsed after the time measuring means starts timing. However, in the case where the variable display device is composed of a plurality of variable display areas and each variable display area can be individually derived by operation of the derivation operation means, the derivation is performed before the automatic stop time elapses. A display result has already been derived in the variable display area as a result of the operation means being operated, and a winning is achieved by the already derived display result (for example, a winning established by the display result of any one of the variable display areas). This does not apply if established.

The slot machine according to means 7 of the present invention is the slot machine according to means 6,
The operation time derivation control means is determined to allow the occurrence of the specific winning (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) by the prior determination means (internal lottery), and the derivation operation means (stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated in a specific operation procedure (stop operation within the pull-in range), and a winning display result corresponding to the specific winning (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is derived, and the derivation operation When the means (stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R) is operated with an operation procedure (stop operation outside the pull-in range) different from the specific operation procedure, the non-winning display result (a display mode in which no winning is established) ) Is derived.
According to this feature, in the specific gaming state, when it is determined to allow the generation of the specific winning as the end condition of the specific gaming state, the automatic derivation time elapses without operating the derivation operation means. In addition to automatically deriving the display result after waiting, it is possible to avoid the end of the specific gaming state due to the operation procedure of the derivation operation means, that is, the technical intervention of the player through the derivation operation.

The slot machine according to means 8 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 3 to 7,
The game control means (main control unit 41)
When the pre-determining means (internal lottery) determines that the specific winning (replay (2) / black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is allowed to occur, the fact that the specific winning is permitted Specific winning allowance notification means (notification of winning the winning transition / notifying the falling role type),
Special gaming state control means for controlling to a special gaming state (BB) that is different from the specific gaming state (RT (2)) and is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state;
Specific winning allowance notification notifying operation determining means for determining whether or not to operate the specific winning allowance notifying means (transition / winning winning notification / falling role type notifying) in the special gaming state (BB);
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect (BB effect) peculiar to the special game state during the special game state (BB);
A specification for notifying in the special effect (BB effect) whether or not the specific prize allowance notification unit (transferred winning combination notification / falling role type notification) is activated based on the determination result of the specific winning allowance notification operation determining unit. Winning allowance notification operation notification means,
Special effect selection for selecting any kind of special effect (BB effect) from a plurality of types of the special effects (BB effect modes A to C) by the player's operation (timing of betting number setting operation at the start of the big bonus) Means,
With
The specific winning allowance notification operation determining means is determined according to the type of the special effect (BB effect) selected by the special effect selecting means (BB effect mode A: at the time of a bell winning, BB effect mode B) : Determine whether or not to activate the specific winning allowance notification means (transition / outward winning notification / falling role type notification) in the BB production mode C: Bell first stop correct answer other than the bell winning selection,
The specific winning allowance notification informing operation notifying means is a notification timing (BB effect mode A: 1/2 at the time of a bell winning or a timing determined according to the type of the special effect (BB effect) selected by the special effect selecting means. When the BB ends, the BB effect mode B: at the time of notification winning, and the BB effect mode C: at the time of BB end), it is notified whether or not the specific winning allowance notification means (transfer-out winning notification / falling role type notification) is activated. It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is determined whether or not the specific winning allowance notification means is activated in the special gaming state, and the result is notified in the special effect, so that the interest during the special gaming state can be enhanced. . In addition, since the timing at which the specific winning allowance notification means is activated or not is changed depending on the type of special effect selected by the player, the awareness that the player is actively participating in the game is increased. Can do. In addition, since the determination timing at which it is determined whether or not the specific winning allowance notification means is activated and the notification timing at which the result is notified are determined according to the type of special effects, these determination timing and notification Timing can be adequately related.

The slot machine according to means 9 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 3 to 8,
The variable display device capable of deriving and displaying a display result in each of a plurality of variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R) capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified,
When a display result is derived and displayed in all of the plurality of variable display areas (display areas of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R), one game is finished, and the display of the plurality of variable display areas (reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is displayed). A slot machine in which a winning can be generated according to a combination of display results derived and displayed in (Area),
The automatic derivation control means for the variable display area other than the final variable display area (third stop reel) from which the display result is finally derived is a control pattern (in accordance with the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery)) Control for deriving the display result of the variable display area based on the stop control table), and the final variable display area (third stop reel) is determined according to the determination result of the prior determination means (internal lottery) Control for deriving a display result in which a combination of display results does not constitute a winning combination when all variable display areas are derived without being based on a control pattern (stop control table) (stop control based on a non-winning position table) It is characterized by performing.
According to this feature, control is performed according to the determination result of the predetermining means, regardless of whether the derivation operation means is operated or automatic derivation control, except for the variable display area where the display result is finally derived. In the case of automatic derivation control, control is performed so that only the variable display area for deriving the display result at the end does not constitute a combination that does not constitute a winning combination. Regardless of whether the operation means is operated or automatic derivation control, it is sufficient to perform control to derive the display result in the variable display area based on a common control pattern. Even when a function to make sure to lose is added at the time of derivation, the reel stop control is not complicated accordingly.

The slot machine according to means 10 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 3 to 9, wherein
The game control means (main control unit 41)
An abnormal winning determination means for determining whether or not a winning display result has been derived (whether or not an abnormal winning is achieved) when the display result is derived by the automatic derivation control means;
An abnormal winning error control means for controlling an error state when the abnormal winning determination means determines that the winning display result is derived (abnormal winning);
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, when a winning occurs despite automatic derivation control, that is, when a winning occurs due to malfunction due to some abnormality regardless of automatic derivation control, it is controlled to an error state. Even if a winning that should not be won is generated, it is not processed as a normal winning, and the fairness of the game is not impaired.

The slot machine according to means 11 of the present invention is the slot machine according to any one of means 3 to 10, wherein
The game control means (main control unit 41)
An excitation continuation means for continuing the excitation state of the excitation phase excited when the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is stopped after the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) is stopped;
Excitation cancellation means for canceling the excitation state that has continued since the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) has stopped after a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the reel (reel 2L, 2C, 2R) has stopped; ,
It is characterized by including.
According to this feature, the excited state continues even after the reel stops, so that the symbols placed on the reel will not be displaced, and the excited state is released after a predetermined time has passed since the reel stopped. Therefore, no load is applied to the components constituting the stepping motor, so that the degradation of the components can be prevented.
Note that after a predetermined time has elapsed since the reels stopped, for example, after the reels stopped, a state in which no game progress operation has been performed for a certain period of time continues to enter the demo state (standby state). It is preferable that the timing after the time when it is assumed that the player has finished or interrupted the game has passed, and by using such timing, the reel can be used while the player is playing. While it is possible to maintain a state in which the arranged symbols are not easily displaced, it is possible to reduce the load on the component parts of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

It is a front view of the slot machine of the Example to which this invention was applied. It is an internal structure figure of a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of a reel. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a slot machine. It is the schematic which shows the wiring connection state of the game control board and the electronic component for games connected to this game control board. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of an external output board | substrate. (A) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal IN signal, and (b) is a timing chart showing the output status of the medal OUT signal. It is a figure which shows the structure of a reel motor. (A) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of starting of a reel motor, (b) is a timing chart which shows the control method at the time of rotation of a reel motor and a stop. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a timing chart which shows the modification of the control situation of a full tank error. It is a figure which shows the structure of the combination used as the object of an internal lottery. (A) is a figure which shows the winning probability of the combination of a combination or combination including watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, (b) is the magnitude relationship of the winning probability of the combination of a combination of watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece or combination FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the selection rate of continuous production A and B, (b) is a figure which shows the character selection rate in continuous production A. (A) is a figure which shows the characteristic according to alerting | reporting mode, (b) is a figure which shows the characteristic according to BB production mode. It is a figure which shows the outline | summary of the bonus production performed when BB (3) or BB (4) wins.

  Examples of the present invention will be described below.

  Embodiment 1 of a slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to the drawings. The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is rotatable to a housing 1a having an open front surface and a side end of the housing 1a. The front door 1b is pivotally supported.

  Inside the casing 1a of the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, reels 2L, 2C and 2R (hereinafter referred to as a left reel, a middle reel and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery. 1) are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and as shown in FIG. 1, a see-through window 3 in which three consecutive symbols among the symbols arranged on the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are provided on the front door 1b. It is arranged so that it can be seen from.

  As shown in FIG. 3, on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, “black 7”, “net 7 (shaded 7 in the figure)”, “white 7”, “replay”, “watermelon”, There are 21 types of symbols that can be distinguished from each other such as “black cherry”, “net cherry (shaded cherry in the figure)”, “white cherry”, “bell”, and “orange” in a predetermined order. ing. The symbols drawn on the outer peripheries of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages in the see-through window 3, respectively.

  The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are provided in correspondence with each other and rotated by reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R (see FIG. 4), so that the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are continuously formed in the see-through window 3. In addition to being displayed while changing, by stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, three consecutive symbols are derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3 as display results.

  Inside the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R that detect a reference position for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and a reel LED 55 that irradiates the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R from the back side. , Is provided. The reel LED 55 includes nine LEDs corresponding to three consecutive symbols on the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, and each symbol can be irradiated independently.

  A display area 51a of a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1) is disposed at a position on the front side (player side) of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R of the front door 1b. The liquid crystal display 51 has a normally white liquid crystal panel having transparency in a state where no voltage is applied to the liquid crystal element, and a transmissive region 51b corresponding to the see-through window 3 of the display region 51a. The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R can be visually recognized from the player side through the see-through window 3. Further, a backlight (not shown) for irradiating the display area 51a from behind is provided on the back surface of the display area 51a excluding the transmissive area 51b, and the back surface further has a concealing member for concealing the inside. (Not shown) is provided.

  On the front side (front side in FIG. 1) of the liquid crystal display 51, an instruction (for example, touch operation) from the player to the display surface is detected, and the position (for example, the position where the touch operation is performed) is specified. Light-emitting devices 56a and 56b and light-receiving devices 57a and 57b that constitute a touch panel for the above-described purpose are installed. The light emitting devices 56a and 56b include a plurality of infrared light emitting elements (for example, LEDs). The light receiving devices 57a and 57b include a plurality of infrared light receiving elements (for example, phototransistors).

  The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed in pairs in the horizontal direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56a and the light receiving device 57a are installed so that infrared rays radiated from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56a can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57a. Similarly, the light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed in pairs in the vertical direction across the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The light emitting device 56b and the light receiving device 57b are installed so that infrared rays emitted from the plurality of light emitting elements provided in the light emitting device 56b can be received by the plurality of light receiving elements provided in the light receiving device 57b.

  In the present embodiment, infrared grids are formed along the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 by emitting infrared rays from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. When a touch operation is performed on the display surface by the player, the light receiving devices 57a and 57b detect the shielding of infrared rays and output a signal for specifying the position where the detected light receiving element is arranged. To the touch panel controller 99 described later. The touch panel controller 99 can specify the position where the touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and the touch panel is formed by these. Yes.

  The light emitting devices 56 a and 56 b constituting the touch panel are installed on the left side and the lower side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51, and the light receiving devices 57 a and 57 b are installed on the right side and the upper side of the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51. The touch panel can detect a touch operation in an area surrounded by the light emitting devices 56a and 56b and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b, and can specify a position where the touch operation is performed.

  On the front door 1b, a medal insertion unit 4 into which medals can be inserted, a medal payout opening 9 from which medals are paid out, and credits (the number of medals stored as a game value owned by the player) are used for one medal. A single bet switch 5 that is operated when setting the bet number, and using a credit, the maximum bet number (a game in this embodiment) among a specified number of bets determined in accordance with the game state within the range. Regardless of the state, the MAXBET switch 6 operated when setting 3), the medal stored as credit and the medal used for setting the bet amount are settled (the medal used for setting the credit and bet number) Is operated when stopping the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, but are provided operable by the player.

  The front door 1b also displays a credit indicator 11 that displays the number of medals stored as credits, the number of medals acquired in BB, which will be described later, and an error code that indicates the contents when an error occurs. An auxiliary indicator 12 and a payout indicator 13 for displaying the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize are provided.

  Further, on the front door 1b, 1BETLED 14 that notifies that the bet number is set to 1 by lighting, 2BETLED 15 that notifies that the bet number is set to 2, and 3 bets are set. 3BET LED 16 to notify when lit, insertion request LED 17 to notify that a medal can be inserted is lit, start valid LED 18 to notify that the game start operation by the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, wait (previous Waiting state LED 19 for informing that it is in the state of waiting for the start of reel rotation since a certain period of time has not elapsed since the start of the game, during replay informing that it is in the replay game described later An LED 20 is provided.

  Inside the MAXBET switch 6, there is provided a BET switch valid LED 21 (see FIG. 4) for notifying that the setting operation of the betting number by operating the one-sheet BET switch 5 and the MAXBET switch 6 is effective. Inside the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R for informing that the reel stop operation by the corresponding stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is effective by lighting (FIG. 4).

  Inside the front door 1b, there is a reset switch 23 for detecting a reset operation for releasing an error state described later and a stop state described later by a predetermined key operation, while changing a set value and confirming a set value described later. A set value display 24 for displaying the set value at that time, and a flow path of medals inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 on the side of a hopper tank 34a (see FIG. 2) described later provided in the housing 1a or A medal selector having a insertion medal sensor 31 for detecting a medal that is inserted from the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the medal insertion unit 4 and selectively flows to the hopper tank 34a side to selectively switch to one of the medal payout exits 9 side. The door opening detection switch 25 (refer FIG. 4) which detects the open state of the front door 1b is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a reel sensor 33L that can detect the reel reference positions of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, and the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R, as shown in FIG. , 33C, 33R (see FIG. 4), an external output board 1000 for outputting an external output signal, a hopper tank 34a for storing medals inserted from the medal insertion section 4, and a hopper tank 34a. A hopper unit 34 including a hopper motor 34b for paying out medals from the medal payout opening 9, a payout sensor 34c for detecting medals paid out by driving the hopper motor 34b, and a power supply box 100 are provided.

  On the side of the hopper unit 34, an overflow tank 35 is provided for storing medals overflowing from the hopper tank 34a. Inside the overflow tank 35, a full sensor 35 a made up of a pair of electrically conductive members spaced apart from each other and provided at a height capable of detecting a predetermined amount of stored medals is provided. It is possible to detect that the medal storage amount stored in the inside when it is conductive by contacting through the medal stored in the inside exceeds a predetermined amount, that is, that the overflow tank is full. It has become.

  On the front surface of the power supply box 100 is a stop switch for selecting whether to enable / disable a stop function for controlling the stop state at the end of BB, which will be described later (a state in which the progress of the game is restricted until a reset operation is performed). 36a, automatic checkout for selecting whether the automatic checkout function is effective / invalid for controlling automatic checkout processing (processing for adjusting (returning) medals stored as credits regardless of the player's operation) at the end of BB described later The switch 36b functions as a setting key switch 37 for switching to the setting change mode at the time of startup, and as a reset switch for canceling the error state and the stop state in the normal state. In the setting change mode, the winning probability of the internal lottery described later Reset / setting switch 38 that functions as a setting switch for changing the setting value of (development rate), power ON / OFF Power switch 39 is provided which is operated when that.

  When a game is played in the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, first, medals are inserted from the medal insertion unit 4 or a bet number is set using credits. In order to use credits, the single BET switch 5 or the MAXBET switch 6 may be operated. When a predetermined number of bets determined according to the gaming state are set, the pay lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 1) become effective, and the operation of the start switch 7 is effective, that is, the game can be started. It becomes a state. In this embodiment, three cards are determined as the prescribed number of bets regardless of the gaming state. In addition, when a medal is inserted exceeding the maximum number out of the prescribed number corresponding to the gaming state, the amount is added to the credit.

  The winning line is a line that is set to determine whether a combination of symbols displayed on the perspective windows 3 of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is a winning symbol combination. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the winning line L1 set across the symbols arranged in the middle of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R and the symbols arranged in the upper row of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R are straddled. The winning line L2, the winning line L3, the lower stage of the reel 2L, the middle stage of the reel 2C, the upper stage of the reel 2R, that is, the upper side of the reel 2R. There are five types of winning lines L4 set across straddling symbols: the winning line L4, the upper reel 2L, the middle reel 2C, the lower reel 2R; It is defined as.

  When the start switch 7 is operated in a state where the game can be started, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, 2R is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window 3.

  Then, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, one game is completed, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a combination) is placed on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5. When the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped as a display result, a winning occurs, and a predetermined number of medals are given to the player and added to the credit. Further, when the credit reaches the upper limit number (50 in this embodiment), medals are paid out directly from the medal payout opening 9 (see FIG. 1). If a combination of symbols with payout of medals is arranged on a plurality of activated pay lines, the total number of payouts determined for each combination of symbols aligned on the activated pay line is totaled. The total number of medals is awarded to the player. However, an upper limit (15 in this embodiment) is set for the number of medals to be awarded in one game, and when the total number of medals exceeds the upper limit, the upper limit number of medals is awarded. It will be. In addition, when a combination of symbols accompanying the transition of the gaming state is stopped as a display result of each reel 2L, 2C, 2R on any of the activated pay lines L1 to L5, a game corresponding to the combination of symbols Transition to the state.

  FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing a configuration of the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 4, the slot machine 1 is provided with a game control board 40, an effect control board 90, and a power supply board 101. The game state is controlled by the game control board 40, and the game state is controlled by the effect control board 90. The production according to the control is controlled, and the power supply board 101 generates the drive power for the electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 and supplies them to each part.

  The power supply board 101 is supplied with AC100V power from the outside, and from this AC100V power supply, a DC voltage necessary for driving electrical components constituting the slot machine 1 is generated, and the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 are generated. It is supplied to the production control board 90 connected through the.

  Further, the above-described hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic checkout switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38, and power switch 39 are connected to the power supply board 101. Yes.

  On the game control board 40, the one-sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the settlement switch 10, the reset switch 23, the insertion medal sensor 31, the door opening detection switch 25, The reel sensors 33L, 33C, and 33R are connected, and the above-described payout sensor 34c, full sensor 35a, stop switch 36a, automatic settlement switch 36b, setting key switch 37, reset / setting switch 38 are connected via the power supply board 101. Are connected, and the detection signals of these connected switches are inputted.

  Further, the game control board 40 includes the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, the payout display 13, 1 to 3 BET LEDs 14 to 16, the insertion request LED 17, the start valid LED 18, the waiting LED 19, the replaying LED 20, and the BET. The switch effective LED 21, left, middle, and right stop effective LEDs 22L, 22C, and 22R, the set value display 24, the flow path switching solenoid 30, and the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are connected to each other, and are described above via the power supply board 101. The hopper motor 34b is connected, and these electric components are driven based on control of a main control unit 41 (described later) mounted on the game control board 40.

  The game control board 40 includes a microcomputer having a main CPU 41a, ROM 41b, RAM 41c, and I / O port 41d. The main control unit 41 controls the game, and random numbers in a predetermined range (0 to 16383 in this embodiment). A random number generation circuit 42 that generates a random number, a sampling circuit 43 that acquires a random number from the random number generation circuit, and a switch detection circuit that detects a detection signal input from switches connected to the game control board 40 directly or via the power supply board 101 44, a motor drive circuit 45 that controls the drive of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, a solenoid drive circuit 46 that controls the drive of the flow path switching solenoid 30, and a drive control of various displays and LEDs connected to the game control board 40 LED drive circuit 47 for performing power supply, monitoring the power supply voltage supplied to the slot machine 1 When detecting a voltage drop, the power interruption detection circuit 48 that outputs a voltage drop signal indicating that to the main control unit 41, the main CPU 41a when the power is turned on or when the initialization command from the main CPU 41a is not inputted A reset circuit 49 for giving a reset signal to the player, disconnection for monitoring an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 and an electrical connection state between the game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 A monitoring IC 50 and other various devices and circuits are mounted.

  The main CPU 41a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function) such as a timekeeping function and a timer interrupt, executes a program (described later) stored in the ROM 41b, and performs processing related to the progress of the game. Each part of the control circuit mounted on the game control board 40 is controlled directly or indirectly. The ROM 41b stores fixed data such as programs executed by the main CPU 41a and various tables. The RAM 41c is used as a work area when the main CPU 41a executes a program. The I / O port 41d inputs / outputs a control signal to / from each circuit connected via a signal input / output terminal included in the main control unit 41.

  Further, the main control unit 41 is supplied with backup power even during a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 41c is held while the backup power is being supplied.

  The main CPU 41a executes basic processing that shifts in stages according to the detection state of various switches connected to the game control board 40. Further, the main CPU 41a has an interrupt function as described above, and can execute an interrupt process by interrupting the basic process when an interrupt occurs. In the present embodiment, the power interruption interrupt process is executed in response to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 48. Further, the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process at regular time intervals (about 0.56 ms in this embodiment).

  The main CPU 41a transmits various commands to the effect control board 90 via the I / O port 41d. A command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is sent in only one direction, and no command is sent from the effect control board 90 to the game control board 40. The transmission line of the command transmitted from the game control board 40 to the effect control board 90 is composed of a strobe (INT) signal line, a data transmission line, and a ground line, and is connected via the effect relay board 80. The game control board 40 and the effect control board 90 are not directly connected.

  The effect control board 90 is connected to the light receiving devices 57a and 57b constituting the touch panel described above, and detection signals of the connected light receiving devices 57a and 57b are input to the touch panel controller 99.

  Electrical components such as a liquid crystal display 51 (see FIG. 1), a rendering effect LED 52, speakers 53 and 54, and the reel LED 55 described above are connected to the rendering control board 90, which is disposed on the front door 1b of the slot machine 1. These electric components are driven based on control by a sub-control unit 91 (described later) mounted on the effect control board 90. The effect control board 90 is connected to the light emitting devices 56a and 56b constituting the touch panel described above, and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are based on control by a touch panel controller 99 described later mounted on the effect control board 90. To be driven.

  Similar to the main control unit 41, the effect control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91a, ROM 91b, RAM 91c, and a microcomputer provided with an I / O port 91d. The sub control unit 91 controls the effect, and the effect control board 90. A display control circuit 92 that performs display control of the liquid crystal display 51 connected to the LED, an LED driving circuit 93 that performs drive control of the effect LED 52 and the reel LED 55, an audio output circuit 94 that controls audio output from the speakers 53 and 54, Supplied to a reset circuit 95 that gives a reset signal to the sub CPU 91a when the power is turned on or when an initialization command from the sub CPU 91a is not inputted for a certain period of time, a clock device 97 that outputs time information including date information and time information, and a slot machine 1 The power supply voltage is monitored, and when a voltage drop is detected, this is indicated Processing for identifying a position where a touch operation is performed on the display surface of the liquid crystal display 51 based on a signal from the power interruption detection circuit 98 that outputs a pressure drop signal to the sub-control unit 91 and the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. The sub CPU 91a receives commands sent from the game control board 40 and output information from the touch panel controller 99, and performs various controls for performing effects. And each part of the control circuit mounted on the effect control board 90 is controlled directly or indirectly.

  Similar to the main CPU 41a, the sub CPU 91a has an interrupt function (including an interrupt prohibition function). The sub CPU 91a acquires a command from the main control unit 41 based on an input of a strobe (INT) signal output when the main control unit 41 transmits a command, and performs a command reception interrupt process for storing the command in the reception buffer. Run. In addition, the sub CPU 91a generates an interrupt at regular intervals and executes a timer interrupt process. Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a power interruption interrupt process according to the input of the voltage drop signal output from the power interruption detection circuit 98.

  The sub-control unit 91 is also supplied with backup power at the time of a power failure, and the data stored in the RAM 91c is held while the backup power is supplied.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, various boards such as the game control board 40 provided with the main control unit 41 for controlling the game are mounted, and these boards are shown in FIG. As described above, electronic components such as switches that can be operated by a player are connected via a cable.

  As described above, on the game control board 40, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, the insertion medal sensor 31, the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, and the reel sensor 33L. 33C, 33R, a hopper motor 34b, a payout sensor 34c, and an effect control board 90 are connected.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the inserted medal sensor 31 are played via the operation unit relay board 110. The reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R and the reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R are connected to the game control board 40 via the reel relay board 120, and the hopper motor 34b and the payout sensor 34c are connected to the control board 40 by wiring. The game control board 40 is connected to the game via the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 is connected to the game control board 40 via the effect relay board 80.

  The operation unit relay board 110, the reel relay board 120, the power supply board 101, and the effect control board 90 are provided with wiring patterns (not shown) for connecting the game control board 40 and each electronic component. The detection signal output from the component to the game control board 40 or the power or signal supplied (input) from the game control board 40 can be relayed.

  In this way, various electronic components and the game control board 40 are connected to each other via the boards 110, 120, 101, and 80 attached to predetermined positions of the main body of the slot machine 1 (the casing 1a in this embodiment). This makes it easy to organize wiring from the game control board 40 to a plurality of electronic components individually arranged at predetermined locations on the main body of the slot machine 1 and allows the connector connection portion to be always connected to the relay board or the game control board 40. As a result, the connector connection portion of each electronic component is fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the connector connection portion from being searched for during the wire connection work or to make a mistake in the type of wiring to be connected.

  Single BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion medal sensor 31, reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R, reel sensors 33L, 33C, 33R, hopper motor 34b, payout sensor 34c Is an electronic component that inputs and outputs signals related to the progress of the game to and from the game control board 40. The signal related to the progress of the game is, for example, an operation for setting the number of bets to make the game startable, an operation for starting the game, or an operation for deriving the display results of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. Such as signals output to the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game, detection of inserted medals, detection of the reference position of the reels, detection of the payout medals, etc., output from the game electronic components in accordance with the progress of the game And a signal input to the game control board 40, a drive signal for driving the reels 2L, 2C, 2R according to the detection of the start operation, and a hopper for paying out medals when a winning occurs. A signal that is output from the game control board 40 in accordance with the progress of the game and that is input to the game electronic component.

  These gaming electronic components are a first electronic component that outputs a signal to the game control board 40 as the game progresses, and a second that receives a signal from the game control board 40 as the game progresses. And electronic components.

  The gaming electronic component and the board are connected via a cable, and the cable connecting the gaming electronic component and the board is designed to facilitate assembly work and wiring work at the time of manufacturing the slot machine. Separation is possible by releasing the connection. These gaming electronic components are basically electronic components that are continuously used in common with multiple models, and there are few opportunities to remove them from the main unit unless a failure occurs. It is fixed in place. On the other hand, the game control board 40, the effect control board 90, and the like need to be replaced when changing the model, and are removed from the main body at that time. That is, when removing the game control board 40, it is necessary to release the connection between the game electronic component and the effect control board 90, so the cable and the board that connect these boards and the board to the game electronic component are: The cable side connector provided at the end of the cable is electrically connected to the board side connector electrically connected to the wiring pattern of the board, and the cable side connector is removed from the board side connector. By releasing the connection, the game control board 40 can be easily removed from the main body and replaced.

  However, when the slot machine is shipped from the manufacturer to the game store in such a state that the wiring connection between the game control board 40 and the game electronic component can be easily released by removing the connector, for example, in a game store, the board side connector In this case, the cable-side connector can be easily removed from the board-side connector, and the cable-side connector connected to an unauthorized tool such as a so-called driving tool can be easily connected to the board-side connector.

  The driving instrument is, for example, operating various switches and the like provided in the slot machine by causing the game control board 40 to input / output a signal that is a pseudo reproduction of the signal input / output to / from the game control board 40 from the game electronic component. It is possible to automatically advance the game without playing. Therefore, for example, in a game store or the like, the regular connector connected to the board-side connector provided on the game control board 40 is removed, and an unauthorized connector connected to the driving tool is connected instead. By inputting / outputting signals to / from the game control board 40 at an appropriate timing to automatically advance the game, for example, it is possible to easily set a state where a special role is won. Therefore, a slot machine set in such a state that a special role is won by using such an illegal driving tool, and BB (2) having higher advantage among BB (1) and BB (2) described later is provided. Slot machine set to a state where the possibility of winning is high (in this embodiment, BB (2) is won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5 as will be described later. Since the possibility is suggested, it is possible to set BB (2) to a state where there is a high possibility that it has been won. If business is conducted, the fairness of the game may be impaired.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable side of the cable 600a. Connection between the connector 611a and the board-side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and connection between the board-side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable-side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is controlled by the member.

  The connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed. In order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, the release restricting portion must be destroyed. As a result, when even one connector connection between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31 is released, the trace remains and it is extremely difficult to erase the trace. Unauthorized sales can be more effectively suppressed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are disconnected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the inserted medal sensor 31, so that the illegal business is more effective. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the first electronic components 5, 6, 7, 8L, 8C, 8R, 31, 33L, 33C, 33R, and 34c that input signals to the game control board 40 as the game progresses. Of the second electronic components 32L, 32C, 32R, and 34b for which signals are output from the game control board 40 as the game progresses, only connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is restricted. A member is provided to restrict the connection between the connectors. That is, the inserted medal sensor 31 which cannot advance the game without the signal (the bet number cannot be set and the game cannot be started unless the signal from the inserted medal sensor 31 is input) and the game control. The connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection with the board 40 to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors, and the connection between the connectors is released between the other electronic components and the game control board 40 to drive the instrument. Even if it is replaced with a connector, it will not be possible to automatically advance the game substantially, so it is possible to prevent fraudulent activities with minimal restrictions, and parts for disconnecting these connectors The score can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, only the connector connection between the inserted medal sensor 31 and the game control board 40 is provided with a connector restricting member to restrict the connection between the connectors, but the start switch 7 and the game control board 40 are not connected. The same effect can be obtained even if a connector restricting member is provided only for connector connection between the connector and the release of the connection between the connectors is restricted. Further, if the reel is not configured to stop until the reel stop operation is performed after the start of the reel rotation as in the present embodiment, between the stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R and the game control board 40. The same effect can be obtained even if the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection to restrict the release of the connection between the connectors.

  In this embodiment, the door opening detection switch 25 is connected to the game control board 40 via a cable. However, any of the connectors of the cable provided between the door opening detection switch 25 and the game control board 40 may be used. When the connection at that connector is released, when the front door 1b is opened, the main control unit 41 mounted on the game control board cannot detect that fact, and the door opening notification or door opening is detected. Since the signal is not output, the discovery may be delayed even if the front door 1b is opened and an illegal act is performed.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, that is, the connection between the board side connector 620a of the game control board 40 and the cable side connector 610a of the cable 600a, the cable of the cable 600a. For the connection between the side connector 611a and the board side connector 621a of the operation unit relay board 110, and the connection between the board side connector 622q of the operation part relay board 110 and the cable side connector 612q of the cable 601q, the connection between these connectors is released. It is regulated by a connector regulating member.

  This makes it difficult to release the connection between any of the connectors between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so that the front door 1b is not notified that the front door 1b has been opened. It is possible to effectively prevent the door 1b from being opened.

  Further, as described above, the connector restricting member is not removable unless the release restricting portion is destroyed, and in order to release the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, the release restricting member When the connector connection between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25 is released, the trace remains and the trace is extremely deleted. Since it is difficult, it can suppress more effectively that front door 1b will be opened in the state where the information that front door 1b was opened is not performed.

  In this embodiment, there is only one relay board between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25. However, when a plurality of relay boards are used, all the connector connections existing between them are connected. It is preferable to restrict the removal, and in this way, it becomes difficult to release the connection of any connector between the game control board 40 and the door opening detection switch 25, so the front door 1b is opened. It is possible to more effectively prevent the front door 1b from being opened in a state in which the notification of being made is not made.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected to the game control board 40. Since it is connected to the operation unit relay board 110 with a single cable 600a, the connector connection between the board side connector 620a and the cable side connector 610a of the game control board 40, that is, the connection of only one connector is released. By restricting, it becomes possible to restrict the release of the connection between the plurality of signal lines, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts for restricting the release of the connector connection, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  When a plurality of signal lines for connecting the main control unit 41 and a plurality of electronic components for inputting / outputting signals necessary for the progress of the game and the door opening detection switch 25 are connected via a plurality of cables. However, in order to regulate the release of these connector connections by arranging the board side connectors close to each other and restricting the release of the connection between the plurality of board side connectors and the plurality of cable side connectors with one component. It is not necessary to prepare a plurality of parts, and the number of these parts can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the game control board 40 is attached to the main body of the slot machine in a state accommodated in the board case, and the upper case sealing piece and the lower case sealing piece constituting the board case are fixed, If the sealing piece is not destroyed, the board case is opened, and access to the stored game control board 40 is disabled, making it difficult to cheat the game control board 40. However, since the sealing piece is exposed to the outside as it is, it is relatively easy to break the sealing piece and open the substrate case, and the sealing piece is broken and accommodated in the substrate case. There is a possibility that the game control board 40 may be cheated, and countermeasures against these cheating are still insufficient.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, a covering member that covers the sealing piece of the substrate case is attached. As a result, the sealing piece of the substrate case is covered with the covering member, and it becomes impossible to directly access the sealing piece. If the covering member is not removed, the sealing piece cannot be destroyed. It would be very difficult to destroy and open the upper case and the lower case to take out the game control board 40, so that illegal actions such as replacing the game control board 40 with an illegal board are effective. Can be prevented.

  The slot machine 1 of this embodiment outputs an external output signal indicating a gaming state, an error occurrence state, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 6, these external output signals are output from the game control board 40 under the control of the main CPU 41a, and the information output terminal board 1010 of the game store (hall) in which the external output board 1000 and the slot machine 1 are installed. Via a hall computer such as a hall computer.

  From the game control board 40 to the external output board 1000, a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets, a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals given to the player due to the occurrence of a winning, a gaming state RB signal indicating that RB is described later, a BB signal indicating that the gaming state is BB described later, a door opening signal indicating that the front door 1b is open, and a setting change mode described later. A setting change signal indicating that the medals are in error, an insertion error signal indicating an abnormality in the medal selector, and a payout error signal indicating an abnormality in the hopper unit 34 are output.

  In this embodiment, there is no challenge time (a gaming state in which the number of sliding pieces on the reel is limited, but winning is allowed for all small roles) or a challenge bonus with a high probability of challenge time. However, in order to make common with the slot machines equipped with these gaming states, in addition to the signal lines for outputting the above signals, the gaming state is a challenge between the gaming control board 40 and the external output board 1000. A signal line for outputting a CT signal indicating that the time is in progress and a CB signal indicating that the gaming state is in the challenge bonus is connected, and a signal line for error output that may be expanded in the future is connected. Has been.

  The external output board 1000 is provided with a relay circuit 1001, a parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002, a terminal for each output signal, and a connector 1003 to be electrically connected to the circuit of the information providing terminal board 1010. ing.

  Of the signals output from the game control board 40, the medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) are directly used as pulse signals via the relay circuit 1001. The information is output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  On the other hand, a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a (preliminary signal) are security signals that are serial signals that can be individually identified by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002. And output to the information providing terminal board 1010.

  The medal IN signal, medal OUT signal, RB signal, BB signal, (CT signal, CB signal) output from the external output board 1000 are output to the hall device via the information providing terminal board 1010. . On the other hand, the security signal output from the external output board 1000 is again converted into a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, a payout error signal, and a spare signal at the information providing terminal board 1010 and output to the hall device. Will be.

  The external output signal includes a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a dispensing error signal, but these door opening signal, setting changing signal, closing error signal, and dispensing error signal are not frequently output signals. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide an external output terminal for each of these signals.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, the external output signal output from the game control board 40 as described above is output to the hall device via the external output board 1000, and the door opening signal and setting among these external output signals are set. The change signal, input error signal, and payout error signal are converted into security signals, which are serial signals that can be individually identified, by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000, and output to the outside. Thus, it is possible to output the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the closing error signal, and the dispensing error signal from one terminal, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary.

  In addition, even if there is a spare signal line that is not currently used but may be used in the future, individual signals can be identified with a single terminal, including the signal output from the spare signal line. It is possible to output as much as possible, and a spare signal line terminal that is not used does not become an empty terminal.

  In this embodiment, the door opening signal, the setting change signal, the making error signal, and the paying error signal are serially identifiable by the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1002 mounted on the external output board 1000. It is converted to a security signal, which is a signal, and output to the outside. For example, any one of a door opening signal, a setting change signal, a closing error signal, and a paying error signal is output by an AND circuit or the like. In such a case, an error signal may be output to the outside through a single terminal. Even in this case, either an error has occurred in the external device, the door is open, or the setting is being changed. Therefore, it is possible to specify that the terminal is being generated, and it is not necessary to provide more terminals than necessary. In this case, since a plurality of signals can be output to the outside with one terminal without being converted into a serial signal, the manufacturing cost can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a uses a medal IN signal indicating the number of medals (credits) used to set the wager number as an external output signal as described above in order to manage sales with a hall computer. Control is performed to output a medal OUT signal indicating the number of medals (credits) given to the player as a result of winning to an external device as an external output signal.

  As an output method of the medal IN signal, a method of outputting every time the bet number is set can be considered. In this method, when the bet number is canceled after the bet number is set, the medal IN signal is output. There is a problem that it is necessary to perform control to cancel the output. In addition, when it is possible to set the bet number using both medals and credits, the bet number is set using a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the medals are inserted and the bet number is set and the credits. It is necessary to separately provide a program for outputting the medal IN signal when set.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7A, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment, when the operation of the start switch 7 is effectively detected, that is, when the number of bets used in the game is determined, The medal IN signals for the set number of bets are collectively output.

  Specifically, when a predetermined number of bets has not yet been set and the insertion of a medal is detected in a state where the insertion of a medal is permitted, every time one insertion of the medal is detected by the insertion medal sensor 31. One bet is added. When the specified number of bets is set, the operation of the start switch 7 is validated. Thereafter, when the operation of the start switch 7 is detected, that is, when the bet number used in the game is determined, the main CPU 41a collectively outputs the medal IN signals for the set bet number. In addition, when the bet amount is set by using credit for all or a part of the specified number of bets, the main CPU 41a is set when the specified number of bets is set and the operation of the start switch 7 is detected. The medals IN signals for the number of bets set to are collectively output.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the game is started, that is, when the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is determined, the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the number of bets is collectively collected from the outside. It is possible to omit the control for canceling the outputted medal IN signal in accordance with the cancellation of the bet number, and the control related to the output of the medal IN signal can be simplified.

  In addition, since the medal IN signal indicating the number of medals used for setting the bet number is collectively output when the number of medals used for setting the bet number is determined, the bet number is set by inserting the medals. Sometimes it is not necessary to separately provide a program that outputs a medal IN signal and a program that outputs a medal IN signal when the number of bets is set using credits, and a program that outputs a medal IN signal is shared. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity for outputting the medal IN signal.

  On the other hand, as an output method of the medal OUT signal, a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or a method of outputting the medal OUT signals collectively at the end of the medal payout can be considered. In the former case, when a medal out error occurs while the medal is being paid out and the medal payout is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the number of medals actually paid out are changed. There is a problem that an error occurs and the external device cannot specify the exact payout number at that time. In the latter case, after the medal payout is completed, the next game cannot be started until the output of the medal OUT signal is completed.

  Therefore, the main CPU 41a of the present embodiment shows that when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT indicating that one medal is awarded every time a medal is paid out. Output a signal.

  More specifically, when a winning with a medal payout occurs and is added to the credit, each time 1 is added to the credit, the main CPU 41a outputs a 1-pulse medal OUT signal indicating the payout of one medal. When a medal is paid out from the hopper unit 34, as shown in FIG. 7B, one medal is paid out and the main CPU 41a indicates the payout of one medal every time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. A 1-pulse medal OUT signal is output. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 7B, during the medal payout, it is determined that a predetermined payout medal-free time has elapsed since the last medal payout was detected, or the medals are continuous. If the detection time exceeds a predetermined medal clogging time and is determined to be a medal clogging, and if the payout operation is stopped due to a payout error state, the number of sheets actually paid out is stopped before the payout operation is stopped. Only the medal OUT signal is output, the payout error is canceled, the remaining payout is resumed, the remaining medal is paid out, and the medal OUT signal accompanying the payout of the remaining medals is output each time it is detected by the payout sensor 34c. Will be. Then, when the payout of the last medal is detected and the output of the medal OUT signal is completed, the control of one game is finished, and the insertion of the medal is permitted at this time.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when a medal is paid out by paying out a physical medal from the hopper unit 34, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal is awarded every time one medal is paid out. Even if the medal is out and the payout error occurs and the payout of the medal is interrupted, the number of medals indicated by the medal OUT signal and the actual payout Since the number of medals coined out matches, the number of medals paid out can be accurately output to the outside.

  Also, in the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively according to the number of medals paid out at the start of medal payout or the method of outputting medals OUT signals collectively at the end of medal payout, more medals are forced than the number of medals that are originally paid out. Medal indicating that one medal was awarded each time a medal is paid out, although it is difficult to detect it with an external device such as a hall computer when an illegal act of automatically paying out is performed. By outputting a signal, it is possible to accurately and accurately grasp the number of medals paid out by winning a small role on an external device in real time. It becomes possible to detect and such an illegal act can be prevented effectively.

  In addition, every time a medal is paid out, a medal OUT signal indicating that one medal has been awarded is output. Therefore, the bet number setting operation is permitted immediately after the medal payout is completed. Therefore, since the next game can be started, the game can proceed smoothly.

  FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are, for example, hybrid type stepping motors, and include a stator 32b and a rotor 32a facing the stator 32b. The rotor 32a has a large number of gear-shaped salient poles (not shown), and permanent magnets magnetized in the same direction as the rotation shaft are incorporated therein. The reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R receive a pulse signal output from the motor drive circuit 45 based on the control of the main CPU 41a, and the respective excitation phases φ1 to φ4 of the stator 32b are excited according to a predetermined procedure. Each time a pulse is received, the rotor 32a is rotated by a predetermined angle (one step).

  FIG. 9A is a timing chart showing a control method when starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R. In the figure, φ1 to φ4 indicate each excitation phase, “ON” indicates an excitation state, and “OFF” indicates a demagnetization state. When starting the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R, the main CPU 41a starts excitation in the rotational direction by a 1-2 phase excitation method, which will be described later, starting from the state where only the stop phase is excited. Specifically, for example, when the stop phase is (φ3), φ1 to φ4 are changed in the order of (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1). Excited alternately in 2 phase, 1 phase and 2 phase.

  If the excitation is started with a phase different from the stop phase as a starting point, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is suddenly attracted to the excitation phase, and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation. In the present embodiment, since the excitation is started from the stop phase as a starting point, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a starts smoothly.

  FIG. 9B is a timing chart showing a control method during rotation and stop of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R.

  First, during the rotation, that is, until the condition for stopping the reel is satisfied, the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method to rotate the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. For example, a pulse signal indicating that φ1 to φ4 is excited is turned ON / OFF at the timing shown in FIG. 9B, and (φ4, φ1), (φ1), (φ1,. (φ2), (φ2), (φ2, φ3), (φ3), (φ3, φ4), (φ4), (φ4, φ1)... in this order, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 phase, 1 phase, 2 The reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated by exciting the φ1 to φ4 alternately for each phase and rotating the rotor 32a.

  Next, when the condition for stopping the rotating reel is satisfied, that is, when the rotor 32a steps out by an overshoot amount described later, an angle at which the symbol (target symbol) selected by the stop operation can be derived and displayed. When the angle position reaches the position (target stop angle position), the process shifts to the reel stop control from the excited state of the two phases. For example, when the condition for stopping the reel is established in the period shown in FIG. 9B as the stop condition establishment step, the process proceeds to stop control after waiting until time Ta when the two phases are excited. .

  The reel stop control is performed in two stages as indicated by T1 and T2 in FIG. The control performed at T1 is called 2-phase excitation stop control, and the control performed at T2 is called 3-phase excitation stop control.

  The two-phase excitation stop control is started from the time Ta when the reel motor is driven by the 1-2 phase excitation method and the state is shifted from the state in which the one phase is excited to the state in which the two phases are excited. In this control, the excited state is held for a predetermined hold time T1. For example, as shown in FIG. 9B, the state in which (φ1, φ2) is excited is held for the hold time T1 from the time when (φ1, φ2) is excited to the state in which (φ1) is excited. To do. As a result, rapid braking is applied to the rotor 32a of each reel motor that has been rotating at a high speed.

  The hold time T1 is determined according to the amount of overshoot that will cause the step-out, and varies depending on the magnitude of the holding torque of the reel motor, the inertia of the rotor 32a, the spring constant, and the like. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the amount of overshoot is four steps of the stepping motor, and the hold time T1 is set as a time required for the reel motor to drive for three steps. Then, the target stop angle position of the rotor 32a is set three steps ahead from the stage where the two-phase excitation stop control is started in accordance with the hold time T1.

  For this reason, at the time Tb when the hold time T1 elapses, the rotor 32a is in a position immediately before the target stop angle position, and the rotation speed is braked. Therefore, the three-phase excitation stop control is started by switching the excitation pattern at time Tb. That is, φ1 is demagnetized, and the stop phase φ3 corresponding to the target stop angle position and the two brake phases φ2 and φ4 at opposite positions across the stop phase are excited for a predetermined time T2. Thereby, the rotor 32a stops at the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3, that is, the target stop angle position while obtaining the brakes by the brake phases φ2 and φ4. As a result, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a stops at a target stop position where the target symbol can be derived and displayed without being vibrated accurately.

  After the three-phase excitation stop control is executed during T2 (Tc), the brake phases φ2 and φ4 are demagnetized, and the motor voltage is changed from H to L while maintaining the excitation state of the stop phase φ3. The reason why the excited state of the stop phase φ3 is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is that the rotor 32a deviates from the holding torque stable point of the stop phase φ3 due to the phase difference between the holding torque and the detent torque or the deviation due to the effect of friction. It is for preventing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the reel from moving finely after being temporarily stopped and the angular position of the rotor 32a when the reel motor is started next time from being shifted from the angular position at the time of stopping.

  The excitation state of the stop phase φ3 that is maintained even after the rotor 32a is stopped is a predetermined time (30 seconds in this embodiment) without performing the next game start operation, and shifts to a standby state (demonstration effect). Is released (Td). That is, after the rotor 32a is stopped, when a predetermined time has passed without the start operation of the next game being performed, all of φ1 to φ4 are demagnetized. For this reason, for example, there is no burden on the components and the like constituting the stepping motor due to the heat generated when the excitation phase is continuously excited for a long time, so that deterioration of these components can be prevented. Further, in this embodiment, the excited state is released at the timing when the state in which the next game start operation is not performed continues for a predetermined time and shifts to the standby state (demonstration effect), so that while the player is playing Can maintain a state in which the symbols arranged on the reels are not easily displaced, while it is possible to reduce the load on the components of the stepping motor in a state where the possibility that the player is playing is low.

  As described above, in order to start the rotation of the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. In this embodiment, the two-phase excitation stop control and the three-phase excitation control are performed. By performing the stop control of the reel motor in combination with the excitation stop control, the rotation of the rotor 32a is rapidly braked by the two-phase excitation stop control and is guided to the target stop angle position, and thereafter by the three-phase excitation stop control. Since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position by excitation of the stop phase while obtaining the brake by excitation of the two brake phases at opposite positions across the stop phase of the target stop angle position, the rotor 32a is rotating. The rotor 32a can be stopped at the target stop angle position without vibrating. Furthermore, since the rotor 32a stops at the target stop angle position, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a is specified, so that the reel can be smoothly rotated at the start of rotation.

  In the slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the medal payout rate changes according to the set value. Specifically, the medal payout rate is changed by using a winning probability corresponding to a set value in an internal lottery described later. The set value is composed of 6 levels of 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest payout rate, and the payout rate being lower in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. In other words, when 6 is set as the set value, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantages decrease stepwise in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.

  In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to turn on the power of the slot machine 1 after the setting key switch 37 is turned on. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 37 in the ON state, 1 is displayed as the initial value of the setting value on the setting value display 24, and the setting change mode in which the setting value can be changed by operating the reset / setting switch 38 is set. Transition. When the reset / setting switch 38 is operated in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display 24 is updated one by one (when further operation is performed from the setting 6, the setting value is returned to the setting 1). . When the start switch 7 is operated, the set value is confirmed, and the confirmed set value is stored in the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41. Then, when the setting key switch 37 is turned off, the state shifts to a state in which the game can proceed.

  Next, initialization of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 will be described. The storage area of the RAM 41c of the main control unit 41 is divided into an important work, a general work, a special work, a set value work, a stop phase work, a non-saved work, an unused area, and a stack area.

  The important work is a work in which data that is inconvenient to be initialized at the end of the BB, such as various display devices and LED display data, input / output data of the I / O port 41d, and a game time clock counter, is stored. The general work is a work that stores data that can be initialized at the end of the BB, such as a stop control table, a stop symbol, the number of medals paid out, and the total number of medals paid out in the BB. The special work is a work that stores data to be initialized only before the start of setting, such as data for transmitting a command to the effect control board 90 and various software random numbers. The set value work is a work in which a set value used when performing a lottery in the internal lottery process is stored. After initializing 0 before setting start (before transition to the setting change mode), 1 is stored The set value that is corrected and newly set at the end of the setting (when the setting change mode is ended) is stored. The stop phase work is a work in which data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R is stored, and data indicating the stop phase is stored when the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are stopped. The Rukoto. The unsaved work is a work that holds the state of various switches, and a value is always set regardless of whether or not the data in the RAM 41c is destroyed at the time of activation. The unused area is an unused area in the storage area of the RAM 41c, and is initialized if any one of a plurality of initialization conditions described later is satisfied. The stack area is an area in which data saved from the register of the main CPU 41a is stored, and the unused stack area is established by any one of a plurality of initialization conditions to be described later, like the unused area. In this case, the used stack area is not initialized because the program continues.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a operates when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON, when a RAM error occurs, when starting only when the setting key switch 37 is ON, BB At the end, when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both OFF, when the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed, the six initialization conditions at the end of one game are satisfied In addition, five types of initialization are performed in different regions to be initialized according to each initialization condition.

  Initialization 0 is performed when the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are both ON at the time of start-up, and initialization is performed before the transition to the setting change mode or when a RAM error occurs. In initialization 0, all areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) of the storage area of the RAM 41c other than the used stack area are initialized. Initialization 1 is an initialization performed only when the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of startup and shifts to the setting change mode. In the initialization 1, the storage area of the RAM 41c is All areas (including the unused area and the unused stack area) other than the in-use stack area and the stop phase work are initialized. Initialization 2 is initialization performed at the end of the BB. In initialization 2, the general work, the unused area, and the unused stack area are initialized in the storage area of the RAM 41c. Initialization 3 is an initialization performed when both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an OFF state at the time of activation, and the data in the RAM 41c is not destroyed. The stored work, unused area, and unused stack area are initialized. Initialization 4 is initialization performed at the end of one game. In initialization 4, an unused area and an unused stack area in the storage area of the RAM 41c are initialized.

  In this embodiment, initialization 0 and initialization 1 are performed before transition to the setting change mode. However, they may be performed at the end of the setting change mode, that is, after the setting is confirmed. In this case, if the set value work is initialized, the determined set value is lost. Therefore, the set value work is not initialized.

  As described above, in order to start the reel smoothly, it is necessary to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a at the start of the rotation of the reel motor. If the data in the RAM 41c including the data indicating the stop phase is initialized, it is impossible to specify the exact stop position of the rotor 32a after changing the setting. When the reel motor is first rotated, Since the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to the excitation phase and the reel vibrates at the start of rotation, the rotation mode of the reel becomes unsightly and the player has forgotten that the setting has been changed. There is a problem of end.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, data indicating the stop phase when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are stopped (0, 1, 2, and 3 indicate φ1, φ2, φ3, and φ4, respectively) is allocated to the RAM 41c. By setting the stopped phase work, the exact stop position of the rotor 32a can be specified. When only the setting key switch 37 is in an ON state at the time of start-up, and when shifting to the setting change mode, the RAM 41c is initialized, but the stop phase work is not initialized. Even in this gaming state, data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained. For this reason, even when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are first rotated after the setting is changed, it is possible to specify the exact stop position of these rotors 32a. It becomes possible to start rotation smoothly. As a result, the reel does not vibrate when the reel is first rotated after the setting is changed, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  In addition, both the setting key switch 37 and the reset / setting switch 38 are in an ON state at the time of starting, and the RAM 41c including the stop phase work can be initialized when shifting to the setting change mode. Therefore, it is possible to select whether or not to initialize the stationary phase work according to the operation method when shifting to the setting change mode at the time of activation. As a result, it is possible to initialize the RAM 41c including the stop phase work, so that an illegal program or the like becomes resident by using the stop phase work assigned to store the excitation phase of the stepping motor. Can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the RAM 41c is initialized when only the setting key switch 37 is activated and shifted to the setting change mode. At this time, by not initializing the stop phase work, Even in the gaming state after the setting change, the data indicating the stop phase of the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R stored in the stop phase work is maintained, so that the reel motors 32L, 32C, 32R are first rotated after the setting change. Even in this case, these stop phases can be specified, but even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the set value is changed, a specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work. The excitation phase indicated by the data set for the stop phase work is excited before the game can be started after the setting is changed. 32L, 32C, when rotating the 32R, may be able to identify these stop phases.

  Specifically, by clearing the data in the RAM 41c as the set value is changed, 0 indicating φ1 which is the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work. After the data indicating the initial excitation phase φ1 is set in the stop phase work, the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work, that is, the initial excitation phase φ1 is excited before the game can be started. . The data indicating the initial excitation phase is set in the stop phase work by clearing the stop phase work in the RAM 41c, but the data set in the stop phase work is changed to the data indicating the initial excitation phase. By updating, data indicating the initial excitation phase may be set in the stop phase work.

  As a result, even when the data in the RAM 41c is cleared as the setting value is changed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase before the game can be started, and the angular position of the rotor 32a. And the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched, and then the data in which the angular position of the rotor 32a is set in the stop phase work when starting the reel motor in the first game is obtained. Since excitation is started in a state that coincides with the excitation phase shown, the reel integrally coupled with the rotor 32a can be started smoothly. Therefore, when the reel is rotated for the first time after the setting is changed, the reel does not vibrate, and it is possible to prevent the player from seeing that the setting has been changed.

  Also, when the main CPU 41a is started, even when returning to the state before the power interruption, the specific initial excitation phase is set as the stop phase work, and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work is changed after the setting change, It is preferable to excite the game before the game can be started. As a result, for example, the correspondence between the angular position of the rotor 32a and the stop phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work by moving the reel manually. Even when the power cannot be removed, the permanent magnet of the rotor 32a is attracted to φ1 which is the initial excitation phase when the power is turned on, and the angular position of the rotor 32a and the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work can be matched. Thereafter, when the reel motor is started in the first game, the angular position of the rotor 32a matches the excitation phase indicated by the data set in the stop phase work. Since starting the excited by state, it is possible to smoothly start the reels are integrally coupled with the rotor 32a.

  In addition, the excitation state of the initial excitation phase is a predetermined time (in this embodiment, 30 seconds, without waiting for the game start operation) as in the stop phase excitation state maintained after the rotor 32a is stopped. It is preferable to be released when the state (the same timing as the transition to the demonstration effect) has elapsed, and in this way there will be no burden on the parts that make up the stepping motor. Deterioration can be prevented.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the overflow tank 35 is full based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a, and when it is determined that the full tank is full, a reset operation (reset switch 23 or reset) is performed. The operation is controlled to a full error state that disables the progress of the game until the / setting switch 38 is operated).

  In this embodiment, medals inserted from the outside are first stored in the hopper tank 34a, and the overflow medals are stored in the overflow tank 35 when the hopper tank 34a is full. Whether or not the full tank state of the tank 35 is detected by the full tank sensor 35a, and the full tank state is determined. May be provided, and the full tank state of the hopper tank 34a may be detected by the full tank sensor to determine the full tank state. In addition, a first full sensor that detects whether or not the amount stored in the hopper tank 34a is equal to or greater than a certain amount is provided. When the first full sensor detects that the hopper tank 34a is full, the flow path of the inserted medal is set. In addition to switching to the overflow tank 35 side, a second full tank sensor for detecting the full tank state of the overflow tank 35 is provided, and the full tank state is determined based on detection of one or both of the first full sensor and the second full sensor. It may be determined. For example, even when the second full sensor detects the full state, the medal stored in the hopper tank 34a may be paid out and the first full sensor may not detect the full state. By switching the medal flow path again to the hopper tank 34a side, medals can be stored until both tanks are full. Further, in such a case, even if only the second full sensor detects the full state, it is not determined that the full state is reached, and both the first full sensor and the second full sensor are full. When it is determined that the full tank state is detected, it is possible to further reduce the frequency at which the full tank state is determined.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the output state of the detection signal output from the full sensor 35a in the switch input determination process performed every 2.24 ms in the timer interrupt process. In the switch input determination process, when input determination of other switches (start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, etc.) is performed, the state is switched from the off state to the on state, and continuously (for a certain period of time) The number of times assigned for each switch type) On the condition that the switch is determined to be ON, the ON state of the switch is determined and the detection flag of the switch is set in the RAM 41c. For 35a, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by switching from the off state to the on state, and the detection flag of the sensor is set in the RAM 41c. This is because the full sensor 35a is driven at a higher voltage than the other switches, and even if noise or the like occurs, there is little voltage fluctuation and erroneous detection is less likely to occur. In this way, in the switch input determination process, the on state of the full sensor 35a is determined only by the detection signal of the full sensor 35a changing from off to on, and the duration from when the full sensor 35a changes from off to on. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the control related to the determination of the detection state of the full sensor 35a.

  The main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a (the presence or absence of a detection flag) only once per game at the timing when the insertion of a medal is first detected after the end of the game control. If the full tank sensor 35a is on, the full tank flag is set and the full tank flag indicating the full tank state is set in the RAM 41c. However, in the next game in which the re-game player wins, the game ends. The medal is not allowed to be inserted until the medals are inserted, and the insertion of medals is not effectively detected. In the next game in which the re-game player wins, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even if the full sensor 35a is detected, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Further, the main CPU 41a detects the inserted medal sensor 31 even when the medal insertion is not permitted. Even if the insertion of a medal is detected during the replay game, the main CPU 41a inserts a valid medal. In this case, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. Even when the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the main CPU 41a sets the bet amount using the credit, and even when the game starts without the medal being inserted, the medal is inserted. In such a case, the determination of whether or not the full tank state is reached is omitted, and even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected, the full tank state is not determined and the full tank flag is set. There is nothing.

  Further, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the full tank flag is set at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the full tank state is determined. When the tongue flag is set, the progress of the game is disabled, and a full error state is controlled until a reset operation is performed. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the replay game in-process flag is set in the RAM 41c before determining whether or not the full tank flag is set after the game control is finished, that is, whether or not the game is a replay game. If it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not the full tank flag is set is omitted. In such a case, even if the full tank flag is set, a full tank error state is set. Is not controlled, and if the replay game ends and is not a replay game, the full tank flag is determined at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10, when the insertion of a medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control, it is determined whether or not the full tank sensor 35a is full based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. If it is on, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is set in the RAM 41c. After that, if the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, after the control of the game is finished, the full-game error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted. On the other hand, when the re-gamer wins in the game and the replay game flag is set (not shown), the full game error state is not controlled after the game ends, and the next game (replay game) After the completion of, the full-error error state is controlled at a timing before the medal of the next game (or the next game if the next game is also a replay game) can be inserted. That is, in the game next to the game in which the re-game player wins, the full tank error state is not controlled.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11, in the game next to the game won by the re-gamer, the insertion of medals is not permitted and the insertion of medals is not detected effectively. Even if the full tank sensor 35a is detected in the state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full tank flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, when the re-player is not won in the game and the medal can be inserted, it is determined that the medal is inserted for the first time when the medal is detected, and the game is full. If the tongue flag is set in the RAM 41c and the re-game player has not won a prize in the game, it is controlled to a full tank error state at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the end of the control of the game.

  Although not particularly illustrated, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, if the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without the medal being inserted, No charging is detected, and even if the full sensor 35a is detected in such a state, it is not determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is not set. Then, after the control of the game is finished, the medal can be inserted, and when the insertion of the medal is first detected, it is determined that the tank is full, and the full flag is set in the RAM 41c. In other words, a game is played by setting the number of bets using credits, and if no medal is inserted during that time, a full tank error state is not determined until the next game where a medal is inserted. There is no control.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, after the game control is finished, the medal stored in the overflow tank 35 is detected only once per game at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. It is determined whether or not the amount of storage is full, and if it is determined that the tank is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. For example, when a replay game or a credit is used, in a game in which medals are not inserted from the outside, monitoring whether or not the amount of stored medals stored in the overflow tank 35 is full, The amount of game media stored in the overflow tank 35 is full even though the medal storage amount does not increase. In addition to being unnecessarily monitored whether or not it has become unnecessary, it is controlled by a full-fill error more frequently than necessary, which causes annoyance to the player and increases the labor of the game hall clerk. There is a problem that it ends up.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the next replay game in which the re-game player has won a prize as described above, the insertion of medals is not permitted until the game ends, so that the insertion of medals is detected effectively. The determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted, the determination of whether or not the tank is full is not wasted, and the full tank can be monitored efficiently. It can reduce the control load required to determine the tank status and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Is possible.

  In addition, since the full tank state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, in a replay game in which the insertion of a medal is prohibited, the determination as to whether the medal is full is inevitably omitted. In performing the control for omitting the determination of whether or not the replay game is full in the replay game, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the game is a replay game.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, whether or not a full error has occurred at the timing when the insertion of medals is first detected in a state where the medals of the next game can be inserted, that is, at the timing when medals stored in the overflow tank 35 increase. Since the determination is performed, the full tank state can be determined at an efficient timing.

  In addition, after the game control is finished, when the insertion of the second medal or the third medal is detected in a state where the medal of the next game can be inserted, the bet number is set using credits. In some cases, an insufficient amount of bets may be set by inserting medals. In such a case, the game is determined to be full in the game even though the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 has increased. In this embodiment, after the game control is completed, the full tank state is detected at the timing when the insertion of the medal is first detected in the state where the medal of the next game can be inserted. Therefore, in a game in which the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 increases, it becomes possible to reliably detect the full tank state.

  Further, in this embodiment, even if the medal can be inserted after the game control is finished, the bet amount is set using the credit, and the game is started when the medal is not inserted and the game is started. The determination of whether or not the state is in a state is omitted, and in a game in which no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not the full tank error has occurred is useless. It is possible to monitor the full tank condition efficiently without reducing the control load for determining the full tank condition and to reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. It becomes possible to reduce the labor for the store clerk to solve the full tank state.

  In addition, since the full state is determined when the insertion of a medal is detected, the number of bets is set using credits, and it is inevitable when the game starts without a medal being inserted. The determination of whether or not the vehicle is full is omitted, and when the number of bets is set using credits and the game starts without a medal being inserted, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is full. In performing the control not to be performed, it is not particularly necessary to determine whether or not the credit is used.

  In this embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and when the full tank flag is set, It is controlled to a full tank error state before the next game medal can be inserted. For this reason, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated once in a state where the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotating by being controlled to a full tank error state from the start of the game to the end of the control of the game. The rotation state is stopped, and the full tank error state is controlled. Thereafter, when the full tank error state is canceled, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are rotated again, or the hopper motor 34b is driven to perform the medal payout operation. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as stopping the medal payout operation once in a state of being in a state, controlling to a full tank error state, and then restarting the medal payout operation when the full tank error state is canceled. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  In the present embodiment, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. It is determined whether or not the full tank flag is set. If the full tank flag is set, the full tank error state may be controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted. Even in this case, the same effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, even when the full tank state is determined after the game control is completed and the full tank flag is set, if the re-gamer has won a prize in the previous game and the next game is a replay game, the game is full. Since it is not controlled by the tan error state, the frequency of full tan errors can be further reduced, so that it is possible to make the player feel bothersome and reduce the labor for the store clerk to resolve the full tank state. It becomes.

  Further, in this embodiment, the determination as to whether or not the tank is full is made at the timing when the insertion of the medal is detected for the first time after the end of the game control. For example, after completion of the game control, it may be determined whether or not the next game medal can be filled up, or whether the game is started. A determination may be made as to whether or not the tank is full at the time of detection or when the game control ends.

  Here, a modified example of the control in the full tank error state will be described. In this modified example, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not it is in a full state based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a only once per game at the timing before the medal insertion of the next game is permitted after the game control is finished. However, the main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game based on the replay game flag before determining whether or not the tank is full, and determines that the game is a replay game. In the case, it is further determined whether or not the medal insertion flag is set, that is, whether or not a medal is inserted in the previous game, and only when it is determined that the medal insertion flag is set, the full tank state Whether or not is determined. For this reason, when the re-gamer wins in the previous game and no medals need to be inserted in the game (when the game is a replay game), or the bet number is set using credits in the previous game, When the game starts without being inserted, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the determination as to whether or not it is full is omitted, and the full state is not determined.

  When the main CPU 41a determines that the game is full, the main CPU 41a disables the progress of the game at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted, and controls to the full error state until a reset operation is performed. To do. The main CPU 41a determines whether or not the next game is a replay game before determining whether or not the game is full after the game control is finished. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled. On the other hand, if it is not a replay game, it is determined whether or not medals have been inserted in the previous game, and if no medals have been inserted in the previous game, determination of whether or not the tank is full is omitted. In such a case, even if the full sensor 35a is detected, the full tank error state is not controlled, and if a medal is inserted in the previous game, the game control after the next game is over and the next It is determined whether or not the game medal of the game is full at a timing before the game can be inserted, and the full tank error state is controlled.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 12, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game at the timing before the medal of the next game can be inserted after the game control is finished, and the next game is a replay game. If not, it is further determined whether or not a medal has been inserted in the previous game, and if a medal has been inserted in the previous game, it is determined whether or not the full state is detected based on the detection state of the full tank sensor 35a. When it is determined that the full tank state is reached, the full tank error state is controlled at a timing before the next game medal can be inserted.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 13, after the game control is finished, when the medal insertion flag is not set, that is, when the number of bets is set using credits in the previous game, and the game starts without inserting medals. In this state, it is not determined whether or not the full tank state is reached. Even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in this state, it is controlled to the full tank error state after the game control of the game is finished. There is nothing. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 14, when the next game is a replay game after the game control is finished, that is, when a re-game player wins a prize in the previous game and it is not necessary to insert a medal in the game, It is not determined whether or not the vehicle is in the tan state, and even if the full tank sensor 35a detects the full tank state in such a state, the full tank error state is not controlled after the game control of the game is finished. Then, after the control of the game in which medals are inserted after the next game (except for the replay game), it is determined that the state is full, and the full tank error state is controlled before the medal can be inserted.

  In this modified example, as described above, after the game control is finished and before the medal of the next game can be inserted, it is only once per game based on the detection state of the full sensor 35a. If it is determined that the game is full, the game progress is disabled and controlled to a full tank error state until a reset operation is performed. Before, it is determined whether or not the next game is a replay game, and if it is a replay game, the determination of whether or not it is full is omitted. It is possible to monitor the full tank state efficiently, reduce the control load required to determine the full tank state, and reduce the frequency of full tank errors as much as possible. Or allowed to think, it is possible to reduce the effort for the clerk to eliminate the full state.

  Further, in the modification, when the bet number is set using credits and the game starts without inserting medals, the determination as to whether or not the game is full is omitted after the game control ends. In the case where no medal is inserted and the storage amount of the overflow tank 35 does not increase, the determination of whether or not a full tank error has occurred is not performed wastefully, and the full tank state can be efficiently obtained. The monitoring load can be reduced, and the control load required to determine the full tank status can be reduced, and the frequency of full tank errors can be reduced as much as possible. Can be reduced.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. After the game is over, the overflow tank 35 is determined. A full tank state can be determined before the number of medals increases. When the full tank state is determined, a full tank error state is set before the next game medal can be inserted, so that the progress of the game is disabled before the medal increases in the overflow tank 35, The amount of storage in the overflow tank 35 will not increase any more, and the full tank error state is controlled between the start of the game and the end of the control of the game, for example, the reels 2L, 2C, When the 2R is rotating, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are stopped once and controlled to a full tank error state, and then the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are restarted when the full tank error state is released. Or when the medal payout operation is stopped by driving the hopper motor 34b, the medal payout operation is once stopped, and a full tank error state occurs. Controlling, when it is released subsequently fully Tan'era state, it is not necessary to perform complicated control such or to resume dispensing operation of medals. That is, it is not necessary to perform control such as interrupting the game control once and then restarting the game control, and the control related to the progress of the game can be prevented from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  In the modified example, after the game control is finished, it is determined whether or not the next game medal can be inserted, and it is determined whether or not the tank is full. Even if it is determined whether or not, the full tank state can be determined after the game is over and before the medal is increased in the overflow tank 35.

  Also, in this case, when a full tank state is determined, the full tank error state may be controlled before proceeding to the next game. In this case, the game control is once interrupted and then the game It is not necessary to perform control such as resuming the control of the game, and it is possible to prevent the control related to the progress of the game from becoming complicated. In addition, since the determination of the full tank state and the accompanying control of the full tank error state are performed almost simultaneously, there is no need to hold information indicating that the full tank state has been determined.

  Next, commands that the main CPU 41a transmits to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a sends a BET command, an internal winning command, a reel rotation start command, a reel stop command, a winning determination command, a payout start command, a payout end command, a gaming state command, a standby command to the effect control board 90. A plurality of types of commands including a stop command, an error command, an initialization command, a setting end command, a power-on command, an operation detection command, and a door command are transmitted.

  The BET command is a command that can specify the number of medals inserted, that is, the number of medals used for setting the bet number. Sent when

  The internal winning command is a command that can specify the winning status of the internal winning flag and the type of the internal winning flag that has been established, and is transmitted when the start switch 7 is operated to start the game.

  The reel rotation start command is a command for notifying the start of reel rotation, and is transmitted when rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R is started.

  The reel stop command is a command that can specify whether the reel to be stopped is the left reel, the middle reel, or the right reel, the area number of the corresponding reel stop operation position, and the area number of the corresponding reel stop position. This is transmitted every time stop operation of each reel is performed and stop control is performed.

  The winning determination command is a command that can specify the presence / absence of winning, the type of winning, and the number of medals to be paid out at the time of winning, and is transmitted after all the reels are stopped and the winning determination is performed.

  The payout start command is a command for notifying the start of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals is started by paying out a prize or credit (including medals used for setting the number of bets). The payout end command is a command for notifying the end of payout of medals, and is transmitted when the payout of medals by winning and winning a credit is completed.

  The game state command indicates the game state of the next game (normal game state, RT (1), RT (2), RT (3), RT (4)) , BB, RB, etc.) and the remaining number of games in RT (1) to (3), and a command that can specify the set value that is currently set. Sent after the end command is sent and at the end of the game.

  The standby command is a command indicating a transition to the standby state, and after one game is over, a credit (which was used for setting the bet number) is set when the transition to the standby state is made after a predetermined time without setting the bet number. (Including medals) is sent out after the medal payout is completed and the payout end command is sent.

  The stop command is a command indicating the occurrence or release of the stop state, and after the end of the BB, the stop command indicating the occurrence of the stop state is transmitted when the ending effect waiting time has elapsed, and the reset operation is performed. When the stop state is released, a stop command indicating the release of the stop state is transmitted.

  An error command is a command that indicates the occurrence or release of an error state. When an error is determined and controlled to the error state, an error command that indicates the occurrence of the error state is sent, and a reset operation is performed to release the error state. At that time, an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is transmitted.

  The initialization command is a command indicating that the gaming state has been initialized and the start of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the RAM 41c is initialized and shifts to the setting change mode.

  The setting end command is a command indicating the end of the setting change mode, and is transmitted when the setting ends, that is, when the setting change mode ends.

  The power-on command is a command that indicates whether or not one of the special roles has been won at power-on, and if it can be restored to the state before the power interruption at startup, it returns to the state before the power interruption. Sent when.

  The door command is a command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, that is, ON (open state) / OFF (closed state). When the power is turned on, one game is finished (after the game is over, the bet number of the next game) Sent before the setting can be started), and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes (ON to OFF, OFF to ON).

  The operation detection command is the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, and these switches are effective in the progress of the game. Whether the bet number can be set and the bet number is not yet set and the operation of the single BET switch 5 and the MAX BET switch 6 is accepted. It is valid when credits remain and is invalid otherwise.Acceptance of the operation of the start switch 7 is valid until the start switch 7 is operated after the specified number of bets is set, otherwise The operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is accepted after the reels are rotated at a constant speed and the reels are ready to stop. It is valid until each stop operation is detected, otherwise it is invalid.The settlement switch 10 has a credit remaining or a bet amount is set in the period from the end of the game to the start of the next game. This command is valid when the switch is active, and otherwise is invalid.) When the detection state of these switches changes, whether the acceptance of the operation is valid for the progress of the game, Sent regardless of invalid period.

  Of these commands, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated in a startup process and a game process described later, temporarily stored in a normal command transmission buffer provided in a special work of the RAM 41c, and the timer interrupt process described above. Sent in (main).

  The normal command transmission buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 16 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  The door command is stored in a door command transmission buffer provided in a special work in the RAM 41c in the door monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above.

  The door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one door command can be stored is allocated. The door command transmission buffer stores a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at the time of power-on or at the end of one game, and after the change of the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Stored is a door command indicating the detected state. Further, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is not cleared even after the door command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored door command. When the power is turned on or one game is finished, the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set, and the door command transmission request 1 is set or the door is opened. When the detection state of the detection switch 25 changes, the door command transmission request 2 is set. When this door command transmission request 2 is set, the door stored in the door command transmission buffer is set. Command transmission is instructed.

  The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer provided in the special work of the RAM 41c in the switch monitoring process in the timer interrupt process (main) described above, and is transmitted in the timer interrupt process (main) described above. The

  The operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and an area in which only one operation detection command can be stored is allocated. The operation detection command transmission buffer includes a single BET switch 5, a MAXBET switch 6, a start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and a detection state after the change when the detection state of the checkout switch 10 changes. An operation detection command indicating validity / invalidity of each switch at the time is stored. In addition, the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is not cleared after the operation detection command is transmitted, and is then overwritten by the newly stored operation detection command. It has become. An operation detection command transmission request is set when the detection state of any of these switches changes, and an operation detection command transmission buffer is set by setting the operation detection command transmission request. The operation detection command stored in the command is transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, the main CPU 41a executes timer interrupt processing at intervals of 0.56 ms. In the timer interrupt process, timer interrupts 1 to 4 are repeatedly performed, and processes unique to these timer interrupts 1 to 4 are performed at intervals of 2.24 ms. The command transmission process for transmitting the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is a timer allocation. The command transmission process is also executed at intervals of 2.24 ms.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a acquires a command buffered in a reception buffer, which will be described later, in a timer interrupt process (sub) that is executed at an interval of 1.12 ms. For this reason, every time the main CPU 41a executes a timer interrupt process, that is, when a command transmission process is performed at an interval of 0.56 ms, there is a possibility that the sub-control unit 91 cannot receive the command normally.

  However, in the present embodiment, as described above, the main CPU 41a executes the command transmission process at a rate of once per four timer interrupt processes, that is, at an interval of 2.24 ms. By transmitting only one of the command stored in the transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, and the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, a plurality of commands can be transmitted. Even in the case of continuous transmission, transmission is performed with an interval of at least 2.24 ms, and these continuously transmitted commands can be reliably acquired on the sub-control unit 91 side.

  In the present embodiment, commands other than the door command and the operation detection command are generated according to the progress of the game in the activation process or the game process, and stored in the normal command transmission buffer. As for the door command, when the door command transmission request 1 for requesting transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is set in the activation process or the game process, or the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is changed. In this case, it is stored in the door command transmission buffer. The operation detection command is stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer when the detection state of any one of the BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 changes. Is done.

  In the command transmission process in the timer interrupt 2, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an untransmitted door command transmission request stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command transmission buffer When a transmission request for the stored operation detection command is detected, a delay time is set, and when the set delay time elapses, the unsent command and door command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer The operation command stored in the door or the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  Specifically, in the command transmission process, an untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. When detected, the random number for delay set in the range of 0 to 17 is acquired and set in the delay counter provided in the special work of the RAM 41c.

  At this time, in the command transmission process in which the delay counter value is set and the command transmission process executed in the timer interrupt 2 thereafter, the delay counter value is decremented by 1 and when the delay counter value becomes 0, An untransmitted command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, a door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, or an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is transmitted.

  That is, the command detected in the command transmission process is a time corresponding to a multiple of the command transmission process execution interval (2.24 ms). Specifically, the command transmission process is performed by subtracting 1 from the delay counter value acquired at that time. Is transmitted after the elapse of time (2.24 ms) {0 to 35.84 ms because the delay counter value is 0 to 17}.

  In addition, the command stored in the buffer for normal command transmission, the door command stored in the buffer for door command transmission, and the operation detection command stored in the buffer for operation detection command transmission are interrupted by the basic processing. Since it is performed within (main), processing is not delayed due to command delay.

  Further, in this embodiment, an area capable of storing a plurality of commands is provided in the normal command transmission buffer, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, Alternatively, a newly generated command can be stored in an empty area of the normal command transmission buffer without waiting for transmission of the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. That is, a plurality of commands can be stored in the normal command transmission buffer. For this reason, it can be avoided that the progress of the game is stopped due to the delay of the command transmission. This is not the case when the normal command transmission buffer is full of untransmitted commands.

  In the command storage process, when a plurality of commands are stored in the normal command transmission buffer, these commands are stored in the order of generation. In the command transmission process, the commands are transmitted in the order stored in the normal command transmission buffer. It is like that. That is, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer are transmitted in the order in which they are generated.

  Note that the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with the highest priority. Before the power-on command or initialization command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, other normal commands ( Hereinafter, commands other than the door command, operation detection command, power-on command, and initialization command are called normal commands) (in the case of an initialization command, store in the normal command transmission buffer before that) Even if the normal command is not already stored since the data is also cleared, the power-on command or the initialization command is transmitted with priority.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer and a door command transmission is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set), in principle, the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is transmitted with priority over the command stored in.

  Note that when the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is a power-on command or an initialization command, or when the normal command transmission buffer stored in the normal command transmission buffer is waiting (delayed), the door command However, this is not the case when a request for transmission is requested, and the power-on command, initialization command, or normal command waiting to be transmitted is given priority. After being sent, send a door command. If an untransmitted normal command remains in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting a normal command waiting for transmission, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is preferentially transmitted.

  In addition, when a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, an operation detection command transmission is requested (when an operation detection command transmission request is set), or door command transmission and operation detection. When command transmission is requested at the same time, as a rule, the command stored in the normal command transmission buffer or the door command transmission buffer is stored rather than the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer. Priority is given to the door command being sent.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested However, the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted with priority, and after the operation detection command waiting for transmission is transmitted, the normal command or the door command is transmitted.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms. Specifically, in any of the timer interrupts 1 to 4 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, in the port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state (door) in which the detection signal from the door open detection switch 25 is converted to a positive logic. Open detection switch 25ON = 1 (door open state), door open detection switch 25OFF = 0 (door closed state)), and is performed by timer interrupt 2 of the timer interrupt process (main), that is, every 2.24 ms. In the door monitoring process to be performed, the detection state of the detection signal of the door opening detection switch 25 acquired in the port input process described above (the input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is logically ORed for about 100 ms (45 times of the door monitoring process). Subsequently, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is determined using the result. If the calculation result is 1 when about 100 ms elapses, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON. If the calculation result is 0, that is, if the door opening detection switch 25 is not turned ON (opened) even once during that time, it is determined that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. Otherwise, it is determined that the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 has changed, the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is updated to a door command indicating the detection state after the change, and the door command transmission request 2 Is set to command transmission of the door command. When determining that the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has changed, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  The main CPU 41a sets the door command transmission request 1 in the activation process or the game process when the power is turned on or at the end of one game, and requests transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. On the other hand, in the door monitoring process, it is determined whether or not the door command transmission request 1 is set. If the door command transmission request 1 is set, it is determined that there is a door command transmission request and the door command transmission is performed. Request 2 is set to command transmission of the door command stored in the door command transmission buffer. In addition, when the door command transmission request 1 is set, the main CPU 41a requests an update of the door open signal output state for the external output board 1000 in addition to the door command transmission command.

  In this way, when commanding the transmission of the door command, it is also required to update the output state of the door opening signal to the external output board 1000, so the door opening signal output state is linked to the door command transmission command. And is updated.

  In the present embodiment, the door command is given priority over the normal command as described above, and the door command is transmitted after a delay time determined at random has passed as in the case of other commands. On the other hand, since the maximum command delay time is 35.84 ms, when transmission of a door command is requested in a state where the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, after the door command is transmitted, Further, it takes about 72 ms until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted. However, the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 is further stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. If the detected state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed if it is shorter than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command being stored, the normal command transmission buffer is stored while the change continues. Normal command sending buffer will not be sent, so normal command sending buffer overflows There is a possibility become. For this reason, in this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is about longer than about 72 ms required for transmitting the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer after transmitting the door command. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the normal command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted until the next door command is transmitted. At least one normal command stored in the transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The main CPU 41a monitors the detection states of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the checkout switch 10 about every 10 ms. Specifically, in the above-described port input process performed every 0.56 ms, an input state in which detection signals from the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are converted to positive logic. (ON = 1, OFF = 0) is acquired, and the timer interrupt process (main) is performed by timer interrupt 2, that is, the switch monitoring process performed every 2.24 ms, the 1 acquired in the above-described port input process The detection state of the detection signals of the sheet BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 (input state that is the same for two consecutive times) is about 10 ms (door monitoring process 5 1) BET switch 5, MAXB using the result of continuing logical OR separately. Determining T switch 6, start switch 7, stop switch 8L, 8C, 8R, the detection state of the adjusting switch 10. When the calculation result is 1 when about 10 ms elapses, that is, when ON is detected even once during that time, it is determined that the corresponding switch is ON, and when the calculation result is 0, that is, during that time If ON is not detected even once, it is determined that the corresponding switch is OFF. If the result of this determination matches the detection state of each switch indicated by the operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer, it is determined that there is no change in the detection state. The operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer is changed to an operation detection command that indicates the detection state after the change and indicates the validity / invalidity of each switch at that time. Update, set operation detection command transmission request, and instruct transmission of the operation detection command.

  Next, the control of the effect performed by the sub control unit 91 based on a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a to the effect control board 90 will be described.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a command reception interrupt process when a strobe signal indicating the transmission of a command from the main CPU 41a is input. In the command reception interrupt process, the command acquired from the command transmission line is stored in the reception buffer provided in the RAM 91c.

  The receiving buffer is provided with an area capable of storing a maximum of 128 commands so that a plurality of commands can be accumulated.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a is the earliest stage. Based on the received command, the control pattern table stored in the ROM 91b is referred to. Based on the control contents registered in the control pattern table, various effects such as the liquid crystal display 51, the effect LED 52, the speakers 53 and 54, the reel LED 55, etc. Control the device.

  In this embodiment, the time interval (1.12 ms) at which the sub CPU 91a performs the timer interrupt process (sub) is shorter than the time interval (2.24 ms) at which the main CPU 41a transmits a command. If an operation associated with a normal game is performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is not received until the next command is received even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. It is read by the timer interrupt process (sub), and a plurality of unprocessed commands are not accumulated in the reception buffer. When a command transmitted from the main CPU 41a is received, the timer interrupt process performed first after that The command received by (sub) is read and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

  In the control pattern table, the display pattern of the liquid crystal display 51 corresponding to the type of command, the lighting mode of the lighting effect LED 52, the output mode of the speakers 53 and 54, the lighting mode of the reel LED, etc. The control patterns of these effect devices are registered, and when the sub CPU 91a receives the command, the sub CPU 91a, among the control patterns registered corresponding to the effect patterns set in the RAM 91c in the game of the control pattern table, With reference to the control pattern corresponding to the received command type, the rendering device is controlled based on the control pattern. Thereby, the production according to the production pattern and the progress of the game is executed.

  If the sub CPU 91a receives a new command during execution of an effect triggered by the reception of a certain command, the sub CPU 91a stops the effect based on the control pattern being executed, and responds to the newly received command. An effect based on the control pattern is executed. In other words, even if the production is not finished to the end, when a new command is received, the production that was being executed is canceled and a new command is canceled unless the received new command is not a command that triggers a new production. An effect based on the command is executed.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when an operation for setting the number of bets is made during the execution of an effect, that is, when the sub CPU 91a receives a BET command indicating that the number of bets has been set, the effect being executed is canceled. It is supposed to be. For this reason, if the player wants to proceed to the next game rather than seeing the production to the end, the production is canceled and the next game can be started. There is no. Further, when a credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed during the performance, that is, after the sub CPU 91a receives a game state command indicating the end of the game, and before receiving an internal winning command indicating the start of the game. When the payout start command is received, the performance being executed is stopped. Credits and bets are settled when the game is terminated. In such a case, by terminating the performance that is being executed, there is an intention to end the game, but the performance continues unnecessarily. It is designed not to be overwhelmed.

  When the internal winning command is received, the effect pattern is selected at a selection rate corresponding to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command, and is set in the RAM 91c. The selection rate of the effect pattern is registered in the effect table stored in the ROM 91b. When the sub CPU 91a receives the internal winning command, it is registered in the effect table according to the result of the internal lottery indicated by the internal winning command. The selected selection pattern is selected from a plurality of types of production patterns according to the selection rate, and the selected production pattern is set in the RAM 91c as the production pattern of the game.

  The control pattern table contains specific controls that are referred to when a specific command (standby command, stop command, error command, initialization command, setting end command, power-on command indicating that special role is elected, etc.) is received. When the pattern is stored and the sub CPU 91a receives these specific commands, the sub CPU 91a refers to the specific control pattern corresponding to the command regardless of the effect pattern set in the game, and The rendering device is controlled based on the pattern.

  When a standby command is received, a demo pattern for executing a demonstration effect (demonstration effect) is referred to as a control pattern. In addition, when the final effect that informs the winning of the special role is being executed, the execution of the demo effect is prohibited, and the demo pattern is controlled even if a standby command is received in such a state. It is not referred to as a pattern, and no demonstration effect is executed.

  When a stop command indicating the occurrence of a stop state is received, a stop notification pattern for notifying that the stop state is in effect is referred to as a control pattern. When a stop command indicating release of the stop state is received, the above-described demo pattern is referred to as a control pattern. That is, when the stop state is released, the demonstration effect is executed.

  When an error command indicating the occurrence of an error state is received, an error notification pattern for notifying the fact of the error state and its type is referred to as a control pattern. When an error command indicating the cancellation of the error state is received, the control pattern that was being executed when the error occurred is referred to. That is, the production at the time of error occurrence is executed from the beginning.

  When the initialization command is received, a setting notification pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed is referred to. When the setting end command is received, the demo pattern described above is referred to as a control pattern. In other words, when an initialization command is received, a notification during setting change is executed, and when a setting end command is received thereafter, a demonstration effect is executed.

  When a power-on command indicating that a special role is won is received, a special role notification pattern for notifying that the special role has been won is referred to. That is, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is won is received, a notification effect for notifying that the special role is won is executed. Note that the notification effect for notifying the winning of the special combination is once executed until it receives a winning determination command indicating that the special combination has won.

  Regardless of whether or not the effect state before power interruption can be restored based on the data stored in the RAM 91c at the time of activation, the sub CPU 91a receives an initialization command or a power-on command before actually starting the effect. Wait until either is received. When the initialization command is received in this state, the data in the RAM 91c is cleared. In addition, when a power-on command indicating that the special role is elected is received in this state, a notice effect indicating that the special role is elected is executed, and when a power-on command indicating that the special role is not elected is received, If it is possible to return to the performance state before the power interruption, the demonstration is performed. Also, in the state of waiting for receiving the initialization command or the power-on command, the execution of the timer interrupt process that executes the presentation based on the reception of the command is not permitted. An effect based on the command is not performed, and no effect is performed until the initialization command or the power-on command is received after the startup and the execution of the timer interrupt process is permitted.

  For this reason, even if the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected when the power is turned on and the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are connected thereafter, the sub control unit 91 does not Since no initialization command has been received, the production control is not performed, and even when the command transmission lines of the main control unit 41 and the sub control unit 91 are disconnected at the time of startup, the sub control unit 91 is turned on. It is impossible to avoid receiving the command and avoid the execution of the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. Thus, when the main control unit 41 is started, the state before power interruption is restored, and before power interruption. When the special role is elected, the winning of the special role is surely notified.

  On the other hand, it is necessary to turn off the power once to connect unauthorized tools such as driving tools (disconnecting the connector without turning off the power). With the above configuration, the connector is forcibly released. Even if the special tool is won by using a driving tool, it can be easily determined from the outside that the special role is won when the main control unit 41 is restarted. , A slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool, and BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2) described later, may be elected Slot machine set in a high state (in this embodiment, it is suggested that BB (2) may be won when the combination of watermelons or chances are aligned on the winning lines L4 and L5 as will be described later. For, B (2) can be set to a state where there is a high possibility that it has been won.) To effectively prevent illegal sales such as providing to a player at the start of business at a game shop, etc. it can.

  Further, the notification effect is continuously executed until a winning determination command indicating the winning of the special role is received, that is, until the winning special role is won. For this reason, until the special role wins, that is, until the winning flag of the special role is cleared, the notification effect will not stop, and it is not possible to cancel the notification effect while maintaining the special role win by the amusement store. Because it becomes possible, BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2), which will be described later, will be elected as a slot machine set in a state where a special role is won using a driving tool. Unauthorized sales such as providing a slot machine set to a state where there is a high possibility of being played to a player at the start of business at a game store or the like can be further effectively prevented.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the main control unit 41 is activated, the main CPU 41a returns to the state before the power interruption and the special CPU is elected before the power interruption. When the sub-control unit 91 transmits a command and receives a power-on command indicating that the special role is won, the sub-control unit 91 controls the liquid crystal display 51 and the effect LED 52 that control the notification effect indicating that the special role is won. , Such as speakers 53, 54, reel LED 55, etc., even if the special role is won illegally, when the main control unit 41 is restarted, the special role is won. Since it is informed by the production device and is in a more easily discriminating state, the slot machine set to the state where the special role is won using the driving tool, and BB (1), BB (2) to be described later )of To prevent illegal sales such as providing slot machines with a high probability that BB (2), which has a higher advantage, has been won, to players at the start of business at a game shop, etc. Can do.

  In this embodiment, the special device winning is notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-control unit 91. However, when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and When the special role is elected before the interruption of power, the credit display 11, the game auxiliary display 12, and the payout display 13 directly controlled by the main control unit 41 may notify the special role. good. In addition, a notification LED for notifying the winning of the special role is provided as an electronic component that is directly controlled by the main control unit 41. When the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is selected before the power interruption. In this case, the notification LED may be used to notify the winning of the special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, the connector restricting member is provided only for the connector connection between the electronic control component (inserted medal sensor 31) that inputs or outputs a signal to the game control board 40 and the game control board 40 as the game progresses. The use of unauthorized devices is also prevented by restricting the release of connections between the connectors, but when the main control unit 41 is activated, it returns to the state before the power interruption, and the special role is elected before the power interruption. In this case, it is possible to prevent the use of a driving tool regardless of whether or not a structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is used, so that the structure for restricting the insertion / removal between the connectors is not used. By doing so, it is not necessary to change the structure of parts in order to regulate the insertion and removal of connectors, and maintainability in the event of a failure, etc. It can be improved.

  Based on the reception of the door command, the sub CPU 91a issues a door opening notification indicating that the front door 1b is opened. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives a door command, if no new door command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the received door command is confirmed and detected. If the confirmation detection state is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed. In the door opening notification, the effect effect LED 52 blinks, the door opening notification screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and an error warning sound is output. After that, the door command is received, and even if 100 ms elapses, the door command is not received and the detection state indicated by the door command becomes the definite detection state. Stops the notification and returns to the original performance.

  In addition, when a door command is newly received within 100 ms after the last door command is received, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the previously received command is not set as the definite detection state. If no door command is received even after 100 ms after receiving a new door command, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the last received door command is set as the detection state, and the determination detection state is If it is ON (door open), the door open notification is performed, and if the definite detection state is OFF (door closed), the door open notification is stopped.

  For this reason, even if a door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is ON (door opening) is received in a state where the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening detection switch 25 is turned OFF (door closing) within 100 ms. When the door command is received, the door opening notification is not performed, and even when the door command indicating that the door opening detection switch 25 is OFF (door closed) is received in the state where the door opening notification is being performed, 100 ms thereafter. If the door command indicating ON of the door opening detection switch 25 (door opening) is received within, the door opening notification is not stopped.

  In addition, when a door command is received continuously within an interval of 100 ms, such as when a new door command is received within 100 ms after receiving a door command and then a new door command is received within 100 ms thereafter. In the meantime, the state of the door opening notification is maintained (if the door opening notification is not performed, the door opening notification is not started, and if the door opening notification is performed, it is continued) After the last received door command, the door opening notification state is determined based on the detection state determined when 100 ms elapses, the door opening notification has been performed so far, and the determined detection state is ON (door opening) If the detected state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is stopped while the door is open until then. If the detection is not performed and the determined detection state is OFF (door closed), the door opening notification is not performed. If the determined detection state is ON (door opening), the door opening notification is started. .

  Thus, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a only transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened from the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25. The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a, and based on the determination result. The door opening notification is performed.

  The front door 1b needs to be opened in order to perform some illegal acts on the parts inside the slot machine 1 such as the game control board 40. Therefore, such fraud can be effectively prevented and can be detected early even if fraud is made.

  Conventionally, in the case of notifying the opening of the front door, the game control is performed based on the signal input to the game control means in spite of the fact that the effect control means performs error notification in order to reduce the control load of the game control means. It is necessary for the means to determine whether or not the front door has been opened, and the control load on the game control means cannot be reduced sufficiently.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the main CPU 41a monitors the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 about every 100 ms, and when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes, the door showing the detection state after the change. Only by transmitting a command, it is not determined whether the front door 1b is opened based on the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25, and the sub CPU 91a detects the door opening detection switch 25 indicated by the door command received from the main CPU 41a. It is determined whether or not the front door 1b is open based on the detected state of the door, and the door open notification is performed based on the determination result, so the main CPU 41a notifies the opening of the front door 1b. In determining whether or not the front door 1b is open from the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 (door open detection switch Chi chattering prevention determination of 25) it is not necessary to perform, it is possible to reduce the control load on the main CPU 41a.

  Even when the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 has not changed, the main CPU 41a transmits a door command indicating the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 at that time when the main CPU 41a is activated and when one game is over. Therefore, even when the sub CPU 91a misses the door command at the time of change, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 can be always acquired at the time of starting and at the end of one game. Even if the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 does not change after the failure, the state in which the change in the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 is not reflected in the door opening notification can be prevented from continuing.

  In addition, the main CPU 41a, as a general rule, when the transmission of the door command is requested (when the door command transmission request 2 is set) when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer. The door command stored in the door command transmission buffer is given priority over the command stored in the command transmission buffer, and the monitoring interval of the door open detection switch 25 and the transmission of the door command are transmitted. The error of the interval can be suppressed as much as possible.

  In the normal command transmission waiting state (during delay) stored in the normal command transmission buffer, the delayed normal command is given priority over the door command, and the delay time has already been reached. Even though the timing is started, the delay control is not complicated by interrupting the timing. Further, the power-on command and the initialization command are transmitted with priority over all commands including the door command, and the return of the sub CPU 91a is delayed by transmitting other commands first. There is nothing.

  In this embodiment, once the door command transmission request 2 for commanding the transmission of the door command is set once, the detection state of the door opening detection switch 25 changes until the door command based on the command is transmitted. The door command is not updated, and even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 changes while waiting for transmission of the power-on command or the initialization command, the door command is overwritten without being transmitted. Can be prevented.

  Also, in this embodiment, a door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer, and transmission management becomes complicated when the door command is transmitted with priority over the normal command. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the door command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. When storing door commands and normal commands in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to disable interrupts when storing normal commands in the transmission buffer. If a door command is stored while interrupting while being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the door command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing blurring of reel rotation and medals to be paid out. However, as described above, the door command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer as described above. It is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing normal commands, even if the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic processing, and stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt processing (main) executed by interrupt. This eliminates the above problems.

  In this embodiment, the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 is the monitoring interval of the door opening detection switch 25 until the normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. Therefore, even when the detection state of the door open detection switch 25 is continuously changed, the next door command is transmitted after the door command is transmitted. In the meantime, at least one normal command stored in the normal command transmission buffer can be transmitted, so that the normal command transmission buffer does not overflow.

  The sub CPU 91a determines whether or not the single BET switch 5, the MAX BET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10 are operated based on the reception of the operation detection command. Specifically, when the sub CPU 91a receives an operation detection command, if no new operation detection command is received after 100 ms, the detection state of each switch indicated by the received operation detection command is confirmed and detected. If any of the switches has changed from the OFF state to the ON state as compared to the previous fixed detection state, it is determined that the corresponding switch has been operated, and any of the switches is ON. If the state has changed to the OFF state, it is determined that the operation of the corresponding switch has been released.

  For this reason, even when an operation detection command is received and the detection state of any switch has changed, if an operation detection command indicating the same detection state as before the change is received within 100 ms, The operation or release of the operation is not determined.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, the detection state of the checkout switch 10, that is, ON / OFF, these switches are in progress of the game. Whether an operation detection command indicating whether the switch is in a valid state or an invalid state is valid for the progress of the game when the switch detection state changes. The sub CPU 91a can identify the operation detected by the main CPU 41a regardless of whether or not the operation is valid, so that one sheet is transmitted. Operation of BET switch 5, MAXBET switch 6, start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, and settlement switch 10 In addition to the timing when the control of the game is made effective and coincides with the timing at which the control of the game proceeds, the effect is executed when the operation of these switches is invalid, that is, at a timing not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. It becomes possible.

  In other words, in order to perform a production operation, a new detection means is not installed, but the operation means is originally installed for advancing the game and detected by the main CPU 41a. It is possible to perform operations for performance even in a disabled state in progress, and the sub CPU 91a can perform performance using the operations of these operation means, so that the timing of the performance can be varied. You can have it.

  In addition, it is possible to specify whether the operation of each switch is valid or invalid from the operation detection command, and the sub CPU 91a operates the switch when receiving the operation detection command. An appropriate effect can be executed depending on whether or not the reception period is valid.

  Further, when transmitting the operation detection command, the main CPU 41a transmits an operation detection command indicating the detection state of the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and the settlement switch 10. However, it is not determined whether or not the switch is operated based on the detection state. The sub CPU 91a determines that the single BET switch 5, the MAXBET switch 6, and the like based on the detection state indicated by the operation detection command received from the main CPU 41a. Since it is determined whether the start switch 7, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R and the checkout switch 10 are operated and the operation status of these switches can be grasped based on the determination result, the main CPU 41a Send operation detection command Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not a switch in an invalid period, that is, a switch that is not related to the progress control of the game is operated (e.g., chattering prevention determination), and the control load on the main CPU 41a is reduced. can do.

  Further, the main CPU 41a, when the normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer, when transmission of the operation detection command is requested (when the operation detection command transmission request is set), or the door command When transmission and operation detection command transmission are requested at the same time, as a rule, commands stored in the normal command transmission buffer or door command transmission rather than operation detection commands stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer are sent. The door command stored in the trust buffer is preferentially transmitted, and the transmission of the normal command and the door command is not delayed by the transmission of the operation detection command.

  When a normal command is stored in the normal command transmission buffer while waiting for transmission of an operation detection command stored in the operation detection command transmission buffer (during delay), or when transmission of a door command is requested In this case, the operation detection command during the delay is transmitted with priority, and the delay control is not complicated by interrupting it even though the delay time has already started. .

  Further, in this embodiment, once an operation detection command transmission request for instructing transmission of an operation detection command is set, the detection state of any switch changes until an operation detection command based on the command is transmitted. However, the operation detection command is not updated, and the operation detection command can be prevented from being overwritten without being transmitted.

  In the present embodiment, an operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer and the door command transmission buffer, and the normal command and the door command are transmitted with priority over the operation detection command. In this case, the transmission management does not become complicated.

  In this embodiment, the operation detection command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interrupt process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, whereas the normal command is transmitted in the basic process. Since it is configured to store in the buffer, if the operation detection command and the normal command are stored in the same transmission buffer, it is necessary to prohibit interrupts when storing the normal command in the transmission buffer (normally If an operation detection command is stored while the command is being stored in the transmission buffer, the normal command being processed will be overwritten, and the operation detection command will be partially overwritten after returning. In such a configuration, interrupts are prohibited every time a normal command is stored, causing reel rotation fluctuations and However, it may affect other controls such as blurring at the time of paying out the command. However, as described above, the operation detection command transmission buffer is provided separately from the normal command transmission buffer. Even when the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the timer interruption process (main) that periodically interrupts and executes the basic process, the normal command is stored in the transmission buffer in the basic process. It is no longer necessary to prohibit interrupts, and the above problems can be solved.

  The sub CPU 91a and the touch panel controller 99 are connected so that data can be transmitted and received by serial communication.

  The sub CPU 91a instructs the touch panel controller 99 to perform a hardware reset at the time of activation, initializes the touch panel controller 99, analyzes the status report transmitted from the touch panel controller 99 upon completion of the initialization, and detects an abnormality. If not, a system-on command is transmitted to activate the touch panel controller 99 system. Accordingly, the touch panel controller 99 shifts to a state in which a touch operation can be detected.

  In addition, when the response to the command transmitted to the touch panel controller 99 is not returned even after a certain period of time, even when the sub CPU 91a is not activated, the sub CPU 91a instructs the hardware reset of the touch panel controller 99 similarly to the activation. The system is supposed to restart.

  The touch panel controller 99 determines that the corresponding beam coordinate is a defective beam when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds based on the signals from the light receiving devices 57a and 57b. Thereafter, the detection of the touch operation at the beam coordinates determined as the defective beam is invalidated, and the detection of the touch operation is performed only with the validated beam. After that, when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, the detection of the touch operation at the invalidated beam coordinates is enabled again.

  As described above, the touch panel controller 99 determines that the beam is defective when any of the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is blocked continuously for 60 seconds, and invalidates the corresponding beam coordinates. If the light receiving devices 57a, 57b and the light emitting devices 56a, 56b are damaged, if a solid object is attached, or if a defective beam is generated due to the object being placed, only the defective beam is invalidated, The touch operation can be detected by an effective beam, so that the touch panel can function normally even if a defective beam occurs. The touch panel can be used even though the touch operation can be detected by a normal beam. It can be prevented from disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the invalid beam coordinates determined to be a defective beam are validated when the shielding state from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b is released, and are automatically restored. However, for example, the touch panel controller 99 may be restored upon a hardware reset or the like.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a transmits a defective beam analysis request command every second. When the touch panel controller 99 receives the defective beam analysis request command, the touch panel controller 99 returns a report indicating the shielded beam and the shielding time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b. Then, when the report returned from the touch panel controller 99 indicates that there are two or more continuous beams that have been shielded for 10 seconds or longer, the sub CPU 91a causes the liquid crystal display 51 to display Please display "and notify the user to remove the object on the touch panel.

  As described above, when there are two or more continuous beams that are shielded for a certain period of time among the beams from the light emitting devices 56a and 56b, that is, when there is a possibility that an object is located on the touch panel, Since the notification for prompting the removal is performed, it is possible to detect and eliminate a defective beam at an early stage due to the presence of these objects.

  In addition, since the notification that prompts the removal of the object is performed at an earlier stage than the time until the beam coordinates associated with the defective beam are invalidated, the cause of the defective beam can be removed before the beam coordinates are invalidated. It becomes possible.

  It should be noted that the sub CPU 91a notifies the user that the object is to be removed, and then returns a report indicating that there are no two or more consecutive beams that are shielded for 10 seconds or more, that is, the object. Is removed and the defective beam is eliminated, or when a certain time (30 seconds) has elapsed, that is, when an object is left on or the light receiving devices 57a and 57b and the light emitting devices 56a and 56b are damaged. In this case, the notification is stopped.

  The effect control board 90 of the present embodiment can perform an operation test of each part mounted on the effect control board 90 by connecting a command simulator (test game control board) before shipment.

  In the operation test, an inspection command specifying a component to be operated by the command simulator and its operation mode is transmitted.

  The slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is equipped with LED, lamp, cold cathode tube and other electrical components, a speaker, a liquid crystal display 51, and a touch panel controlled by the sub-control unit 91. An output port and its output port It is possible to inspect the operation of the designated part by designating the part corresponding to 1 and its operation mode by the inspection command. The inspection command is composed of 2 bytes. The output port is designated by the first byte, and the component to be operated and the operation mode are designated by the second byte.

  In the inspection command that inspects the operation of the lighting component, you can specify lighting and extinguishing as the operation mode, and if the lighting component can turn on multiple colors, you can also specify the lighting color It is.

  In the inspection command to inspect the operation of the speaker, as the operation mode, the output from both left and right only, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the sound ROM (ROM that stores sound data output from the speaker) Can be specified.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the operation mode includes color bar display, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen display, CGROM (liquid crystal display 51 ROM check of image data (CG data to be displayed on CG), display area check of liquid crystal display 51, display of image data A to D stored in CGROM, and check of VRAM. Is possible.

  In the inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, it is possible to specify a defective beam check of the touch panel and an operation check of the touch panel as operation modes. When the touch panel defect check is designated, the voice ROM and CGROM ROM checks are also designated at the same time.

  As another inspection command, there is an inspection command for confirming the backup of the bonus medium effect. In this inspection command, the display of the bonus medium screen, the operation of the electrical components in the bonus, and the BGM output in the bonus are designated.

  In one inspection command, it is possible to specify only one output port, components corresponding to the output port, and operation modes, and when different components of the output port are operated simultaneously and inspected, Send inspection commands with specified ports continuously. For this reason, it is necessary to transmit 40 inspection commands continuously even if only the test for operating all the electrical parts is performed, and the operation of parts other than the electrical parts is also tested at the same time. In some cases, it is necessary to continuously transmit a maximum of 128 inspection commands according to the combination.

  Note that in the command simulator, an inspection command for designating the operation of a plurality of illumination parts, an examination command for designating the operation of the illumination parts, an inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker, and an inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 The inspection command for designating the operation of the speaker and the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted simultaneously, but the liquid crystal display 51 different from the inspection command for designating the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 can be transmitted. It is not possible to simultaneously transmit operation commands that specify operations that cannot be performed simultaneously, such as inspection commands that specify the operation of the liquid crystal display 51 and inspection commands that specify the operation of the touch panel. It has become.

  As described above, if an operation associated with a normal game is being performed, an unprocessed command stored in the reception buffer is the next command even when commands are continuously transmitted from the main CPU 41a. Since it is read out by the timer interrupt process (sub) before reception, a plurality of unprocessed commands are not stored in the reception buffer. However, in the operation test by the command simulator, a maximum of 128 inspection commands are continuously recorded. Since there is a possibility of transmission, an area capable of storing 128 commands is provided in the reception buffer of the RAM 91c.

  In the timer interrupt process (sub), the sub CPU 91a determines whether or not an unprocessed command is stored in the reception buffer. If an unprocessed command is stored, the sub CPU 91a receives it from the reception buffer at the earliest stage. The read command is read out, and it is determined whether or not the read command is an inspection command. As a result, when the read command is an inspection command, the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode are specified, and the specified component is operated in the specified operation mode. As a result, the operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the command simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the electrical component, the sub CPU 91a identifies the electrical component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode such as lighting, extinction, and lighting color, and designates the corresponding electrical component. The operation is performed in the mode described above.

  When the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the speaker, the operation designated by the inspection command such as output from both the left only, the right only from both the left and right, the type of sound to be output, and the ROM check of the audio ROM The mode is specified, and the speaker is operated in the specified operation mode. In particular, when the ROM check of the voice ROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the voice ROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b, and the result of whether or not they match is determined. It is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of a color bar, red display, green display, blue display, white display, black display, electrostatic test screen The operation mode specified by the inspection command such as the CGROM ROM check, the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51, the display of the image data A to D stored in the CGROM, the VRAM check is specified, and the liquid crystal display 51 is specified. It operates in the mode of operation. In particular, when the ROM check of the CGROM is designated, the confirmation data stored in the CGROM is compared with the stored data stored in the ROM 91b as in the case of the ROM check of the audio ROM. The result of whether or not to do so is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the display area check of the liquid crystal display 51 is designated, an image showing the displayable area is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. When the VRAM check is designated, the VRAM is expanded in the memory area and an image for VRAM check is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives an inspection command for inspecting the operation of the touch panel, the sub CPU 91a specifies an operation mode specified by the inspection command such as a check for a defective beam on the touch panel, an operation check on the touch panel, and the touch panel and the liquid crystal display 51. Operate in the specified operation mode. In particular, when a check for a defective beam on the touch panel is designated, a defective beam analysis request command is transmitted to the touch panel controller 99, and whether there is a beam that is blocked for 60 seconds or more based on the returned report. If there is a beam that is shielded for 60 seconds or longer, a red line is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51 in correspondence with the shielded beam. In addition, when the check of the defective beam of the touch panel is designated, the voice ROM and the CGROM are also checked. In addition, there are two types of touch panel operation checks. When operation check 1 is specified, the touch panel is fully activated, a ticker “Please touch” is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and a touch operation is detected. The reception of a new command is prohibited until it is done. When the operation check 2 is designated, the entire touch panel is enabled, and a 64 divided screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the color of the frame where the touch operation is detected is changed. Also in this case, reception of a new command is prohibited until a touch operation is detected.

  Further, when the sub CPU 91a receives the inspection command for inspecting the backup of the bonus medium effect, the sub CPU 91a specifies the part and the operation mode designated by the inspection command, and the operation in which the liquid crystal display 51, the speaker, and the electrical decoration part are designated. Operate in a manner.

  As described above, the sub CPU 91a identifies the component specified by the inspection command and its operation mode based on the reception of the inspection command, and operates the identified component in the specified operation mode. The operation status based on the inspection command transmitted from the simulator can be confirmed from the outside.

  In general, the effect control means has the same number of reception buffers as the transmission buffers of the game control means, and the number of transmission buffers and the number of reception buffers are such that there is no overflow in the case of a normal game. Therefore, as long as the game is played normally, more commands than the reception buffer are not transmitted continuously, and the command transmitted from the game control means overflows. There is no. However, in the operation test for inspecting whether or not the production control means operates normally during development or before shipment as described above, a large number of commands are connected by connecting the test game control means to the production control means. It is possible to increase the efficiency of the operation test by continuously transmitting the message, but if the number of reception buffers is the same as the number of transmission buffers as described above, a large number of commands are transmitted during the operation test. There is a risk that the reception buffer overflows and the operation test cannot be performed accurately. For this reason, it is necessary to increase the number of commands or transmission intervals that are continuously transmitted during the operation test, and as a result, there arises a problem that the efficiency of the operation test cannot be sufficiently increased.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, the command that the main control unit 41 transmits to the sub control unit 91 is stored in the reception buffer that stores the command received by the sub control unit 91 from the main control unit 41. A storage area capable of storing a larger number of commands than the command storage area of the command transmission buffer is provided. Accordingly, when an operation test board such as a command simulator is connected to the effect control board 90 and an operation test is performed, the number of inspection commands that can be transmitted at one time and the transmission interval can be transmitted even when the inspection commands are continuously transmitted. However, the number of storage areas of the normal command transmission buffer provided in the main control unit 41, that is, the number of storage areas allocated as many as possible so as not to overflow assuming a normal game (16 commands in this embodiment) The number of test commands can be continuously transmitted up to the limit of the receiving buffer storage area (128 commands in this embodiment) without being limited according to the efficiency of the operation test. Can be effectively increased.

  Further, in this embodiment, for each inspection command, a plurality of lighting parts, liquid crystal display 51, touch panel and other effect parts can be individually designated and an operation test can be performed. By transmitting an inspection command for designating each production component such as a certain electrical decoration component, liquid crystal display 51, and touch panel, it is possible to accurately inspect whether or not each production component operates normally.

  In the present embodiment, when an operation test is performed in the slot machine 1, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port, and an operation mode thereof with one inspection command. Therefore, a storage area that can store a larger number of commands based on the number of output ports is provided in the storage area of the reception buffer, and operation tests of all the production parts are performed collectively. In this case, even when the inspection commands corresponding to the respective output ports are continuously transmitted, the reception buffer does not overflow, so that the operation test can be performed more efficiently.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to specify only one output port, a production component corresponding to the output port and its operation mode with one inspection command, but with one inspection command, It may be possible to specify only one performance component and its operation correspondence. In this case, by providing a storage area in the reception buffer that can store more commands than the number of performance components, When performing production component operation tests in a batch, even if inspection commands corresponding to each production component are sent continuously, the reception buffer does not overflow, so the operation test is more efficient. It can be performed.

  In the gaming machine in which the production control means controls the production according to the operation of the production operation means such as a touch panel as in the present embodiment, it is necessary to inspect the detection status of the operation of the production operation means. If the next inspection command is mistakenly transmitted before the operation is detected, the next inspection command is received without waiting for the detection of the operation of the operation means for production, and the next operation test is performed. There is a problem that the detection of the operation detection status of the operation means for production cannot be normally performed.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91a according to the present embodiment receives the inspection command designating the touch panel operation check and performs the touch panel operation check, the sub CPU 91a performs the command reception interrupt process until the touch operation is detected. During this time, new commands are not received, and even if a new command is transmitted during this time, the new command will not be detected until the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. It is not received and processing based on the command is not performed. For this reason, even when the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check inspection of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  The sub CPU 91a not only prohibits command reception interrupt processing but also stores it in the reception buffer until a touch operation is detected after receiving an inspection command designating an operation check of the touch panel. Even if the command is already received and the received command is stored in the reception buffer, the touch operation is detected and the operation check is completed. The processing based on the command stored in the reception buffer is not performed. For this reason, even when another inspection command is transmitted in succession to the inspection command designating the operation check of the touch panel, the operation check inspection of the touch panel can be normally performed.

  In this embodiment, the touch panel is applied as the production operation means. However, production operation means other than the touch panel, such as buttons and dials, may be applied, and operation checks other than the production operation means other than the touch panel may be performed. Even in the case of performing the operation check, even if the inspection command is erroneously transmitted without waiting for the completion of the operation check by prohibiting the reception of the command until the operation of the effect operating means is detected in the same manner as described above. The inspection can be performed normally, and the command stored in the reception buffer is not read out until the operation of the production operation means is detected, so that another inspection command specifying the operation check is continuously performed. Even when the inspection command is transmitted, the operation check can be normally performed.

  In the slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the prescribed number of bets that can be set according to the gaming state is determined as described above, and the prescribed number of bets that are determined according to the gaming state is set. It becomes possible to start the game on the condition. In this embodiment, as will be described later, as a gaming state, a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as RB), a normal gaming state, RT (1) (replay time (1)), RT (2) (replay time (2) ), RT (3) (replay time (3)), and RT (4) (replay time (4)), but 3 is defined as the prescribed number of bets in any gaming state. Therefore, regardless of whether the gaming state is RB, the normal gaming state, or RT (1) to RT (4), the game can be started when 3 is set as the bet number. It becomes possible. In this embodiment, when a specified number of bets according to the gaming state is set, all the winning lines L1 to L5 are activated, and the number of bets regardless of the gaming state. As a result, all winning lines L1 to L5 are activated at the time when 3 is set.

  In the slot machine 1 of this embodiment, when all the reels 2L, 2C, 2R are stopped, the activated pay line (in the present embodiment, all the pay lines are always enabled. The activated winning line is simply referred to as a winning line), and a winning combination is obtained when a combination of symbols called “comb” is arranged. The combination may be a combination of the same symbols or a combination including different symbols. The type of winning combination is determined according to the game state, but it can be roughly divided into a small role with payout of medals and a replay that can start the next game without the need to set the number of bets. There are a game combination and a special combination with a transition of the game state. Below, a small role and a re-playing role are collectively called a general role. In order for winning of each combination determined according to the gaming state to occur, it is necessary to win an internal lottery to be described later and set a winning flag of the combination in the RAM 41c.

  Of these winning flags, the winning flags for the small role and the replaying role are valid only in the game in which the flag is set, and are invalid in the next game. It is valid until the combination of combinations permitted by the flag is complete, and is invalid in a game having the combination of combinations permitted. In other words, once the winning flag for a special role is won, even if the combination of characters allowed by the flag cannot be aligned, the winning flag is not invalidated and is carried over to the next game. It becomes. Of the special roles, BB (3) and BB (4), which will be described later, are always won in the winning game, and are not carried over after the next game.

  As the role in this slot machine 1, as shown in FIG. 15, big bonuses (1) to (4) (hereinafter referred to as big bonus and BB) are special roles, and watermelon, one piece, black cherry are used as small roles. Replays (1) and (2) are defined as re-playing roles for net cherry, white cherry, and bell. In addition, combinations of roles in the slot machine 1 include BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + black Cherry, BB (2) + net cherry, BB (2) + white cherry, watermelon + 1 is determined.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the combination of combinations and combinations of combinations that are subject to lottery differ depending on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (4), or RB. . Furthermore, the lottery depends on whether the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3), RT (2) other than carrying over, RT (4), RT (2) carrying over. Target combination and combination of combinations are different.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over (the normal gaming state, RT (1) ( 3) When the special role is won, the game moves to RT (4). Therefore, in the normal gaming state (the special role is not carried over in RT (1) (3)), BB (1) to (4), BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + black cherry, BB (2) + net cherry, BB (2 ) + White cherry, replay (1), replay (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, bell are subject to internal lottery.

  In addition, the gaming state is RT (4) or RT (2), and any special combination is carried over (when the special combination is won in the normal gaming state as described later, or RT (1), When a special role is elected at RT (3), it will be transferred to RT (4) when the special role is elected at the end of RT (2), so the special role is always carried over at RT (4). Are) Replay (1), Replay (2), Watermelon, Watermelon + 1, Black Cherry, Net Cherry, White Cherry, and Bell are the targets for internal lottery. When the gaming state is RB, watermelon, watermelon + 1, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell are targeted for internal lottery.

  The black cherry is awarded when the symbol “black cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The net cherry is awarded when the symbol “net cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The white cherry is awarded when the symbol “white cherry” is derived on any of the winning lines for the left reel in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. If the symbol “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” stops at the upper or lower stage of the left reel, the two winning lines L2 and L4 or the winning lines L3 and L5 are displayed. A combination of black cherries, net cherries or white cherries is prepared, and black cherries, net cherries or white cherries are won on two winning lines, so two medals are paid out.

  The watermelon is awarded when a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out. One is awarded when a combination of “Black 7-Black Cherry-Black 7” is aligned on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and one medal is paid out. The bell is awarded when a combination of “bell-bell-bell” is arranged on any of the winning lines in any gaming state, and 15 medals are paid out.

  Replay (1) is awarded when a combination of “replay-replay-replay” is arranged on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. (Replay (2) is awarded when the combination of “Bell-Replay-Replay” is aligned on any of the winning lines in a gaming state other than RB. When Replay (1) or Replay (2) is won. Although there is no payout of medals, the next game can be started without setting the number of bets again, so in effect the three medals corresponding to the number of bets that became unnecessary in the next game are paid out. Same thing.

  BB is a combination of “Black 7-Black 7-White 7”, “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7”, and “Bell-Replay-Bell” in any of the winning lines in gaming states other than RB , “Replay-Bell-Bell” combination is awarded when winning. In this embodiment, BB (1) is awarded when the combination of “black 7-black 7-white 7” is complete, and the prize is awarded when the combination of “black 7-black 7-black 7” is complete. BB will be BB (2), and the winning BB will be BB (3) when the combination of "Bell-Replay-Bell" is complete, and the winning will be when the "Replay-Bell-Bell" combination is complete BB which becomes becomes BB (4).

  When BB (1) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (1), when BB (2) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (2), and when BB (3) wins, the gaming state changes to BB. When shifting to (3) and BB (4) wins, the gaming state shifts to BB (4). When transitioning to BB (1) to (4), transition to RB is performed simultaneously with transition to BB (1) to (4). The RB is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player over other gaming states by increasing the winning probability of the small role, particularly the bell, and when the 12 games are digested after the RB starts, or an 8-game winning ( When the type of a combination is allowed), it ends either whichever comes first. If BB (1) to (4) has not ended when RB ends, the process proceeds to RB again, and is controlled to RB repeatedly until BB (1) to (4) ends. In other words, during BB (1) to (4), the RB is always controlled to RB.

  Then, BB (1) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (1) exceeds 150, and BB (2) is sent to the player in the BB (2). The process ends when the total number of medals paid out exceeds 465, and BB (3) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (3) exceeds 300, and BB (3 4) ends when the total number of medals paid out to the player in the BB (4) exceeds 100. At the end of the BB, the RB is also ended regardless of whether or not the RB end condition is satisfied.

  Hereinafter, the internal lottery of the present embodiment will be described. In the internal lottery, it is determined whether or not the above winning combination is permitted before the display results of all the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R are derived and displayed (actually, when the start switch 7 is detected). To do. In the internal lottery, first, a random number for internal lottery (an integer from 0 to 16383) is acquired as described later. And, for each combination of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state and the number of bets, the obtained random numbers for internal lottery and combinations of combinations and combinations determined according to the gaming state, the number of bets and the set value This is performed according to the number of determination values. In this embodiment, based on the number of judgment values for each combination and combination of combinations, a range of determination values for each of the general combination and special combination, and a range of determination values for the combination of general combination and special combination is won. And the winning in the internal lottery is not exclusive, and a general combination and a special combination may be won simultaneously in one game. However, for special roles of different types, the range of determination values to be won in duplicate is not specified, and special types of different types are exclusively drawn.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to RT (3), and no special role is carried over, BB (1) to (4), BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1 ) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + black cherry, BB (2) + net cherry, BB (2) + white cherry, replay (1) , Replay (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RT (4) or RT (2) and any special role is carried over, replay (1), replay (2), watermelon, watermelon + 1 piece, black cherry, net cherry, White cherries and bells are sequentially read out as target combinations for internal lottery.

  When the gaming state is RB, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, black cherry, net cherry, white cherry, and bell are sequentially read out as the subject combination of the internal lottery.

  In the internal lottery, the number of judgment values determined for the combination or combination of roles that are the subject of the internal lottery and the current gaming state are sequentially added to the random number for internal lottery, and when the result of the addition overflows, Or it is determined that the combination of the winning combination is won.

  If a winning combination of any combination or combination of combinations is determined, a winning flag corresponding to the combination of combination or combination determined to be winning is set in the internal winning flag storage work assigned to the RAM 41c. The internal winning flag storage work consists of a storage area of 2 bytes, of which the upper byte is assigned as the special role storing work for which the special role winning flag is set, and the lower byte is the winning of the general role It is assigned as a general role storage work for which a flag is set. Specifically, when a special combination is won, a special combination winning flag indicating that the special combination is won is set in the special combination storing work, and the winning flag set in the general combination storing work is cleared. In addition, when a special role + general role is won, a special role winning flag indicating that the special role is won is set in the special role storage work, and a general role winning indicating that the general role is won Set the flag in the general role storage work. When a general combination is won, a winning flag for the general combination indicating that the general combination is won is set in the general combination storing work. If no winning combination is selected, only the general winning combination work is cleared.

  Next, stop control of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R will be described.

  The main CPU 41a refers to the table index and the table creation data stored in the ROM 41b when the rotation of the reel starts and when the reel stops and the reel that is still rotating still remains. Create a stop control table for each reel. When any of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to and the slip of the referred stop control table is referred to. Based on the number of frames, control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R corresponding to the operated stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R.

  In the table index, an index that indicates the start address of the area in which the data for table creation is stored, from the reference address when referring to the table index, according to the setting state of the winning flag by internal lottery (hereinafter referred to as the internal winning state) Differences up to the address where the data is stored are registered. As a result, a difference corresponding to the internal winning state is acquired, and the corresponding index data can be acquired by adding the difference to the reference address. Note that even if the winning status of the combination is different, the same control is applied (for example, the same in BB (1) + replay (1) winning and BB (2) + replay (1) winning) The same address is stored as the index data, and in such a case, the stop control table is created by referring to the same table creation data. Become.

  The table creation data includes a stop control table indicating the number of sliding frames according to the stop operation position, and an address of the stop control table to be referred to according to the reel stop status.

  The stop control table referred to according to the reel stop status is whether all reels are rotating, only the left reel is stopped, only the middle reel is stopped, only the right reel is stopped, It may vary depending on whether the middle reel is stopped, the left and right reels are stopped, the middle and right reels are stopped, and if any reel is stopped, stop Since there may be differences depending on the stop position of the reels already completed, the address of the stop control table to be referenced for each situation is registered for each rotating reel, and based on the top address of the table creation data, It is possible to specify the address of the stop control table that should be referred to according to the status of each, and it is necessary according to each status from this specified address. And to be able to identify the stop control table. Even when the reel stop status and the stopped position of the stopped reel are different, when the same stop control table is applied, the same address may be registered as the address of the stop control table. In such a case, the same stop control table is referred to.

  The stop control table is data that can specify the number of sliding frames for each timing when the stop operation is performed. In this embodiment, stepping motors that make one turn at a cycle of 168 steps (0 to 167) are used for the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R. That is, when the reel motors 32L, 32C, and 32R are driven for 168 steps, the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R make one round. Then, 21 areas (frames) divided every 16 steps (number of steps in which one symbol moves) are defined for one reel, and these areas are areas 1 to 21 from the reel reference position. A number is assigned. On the other hand, the number of symbols arranged on one reel is 21, and symbol numbers 1 to 21 from the reel reference position are assigned to symbols on each reel. , Area numbers 1 to 21 are assigned in order. In the stop control table, the number of sliding symbols for each area number is compressed and stored according to a predetermined rule, and the number of sliding symbols for each area number can be acquired by expanding the stop control table. Yes.

  As described above, the stop control table created by referring to the table index and the table creation data corresponds to the area number, and the area corresponding to each area number is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3). Sliding frame when an operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R is detected at a timing (a timing in which the number of steps from the reel reference position is included in the range of the number of steps of each region number). It is a table with each number set.

  Next, the procedure for creating the stop control table will be described. First, at the start of reel rotation, the top address of the table creation data corresponding to the internal winning state of the game is acquired. Specifically, the table index is first referred to, index data corresponding to the internal winning state is obtained, table creation data is identified based on the obtained index data, and all reels are identified from the identified table creation data. The address of the stop control table for each reel corresponding to the state of rotation is acquired, and the stop control table for each reel stored at the acquired address is expanded to generate a stop control table for all reels.

  Next, when the main CPU 41a effectively detects any one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel, the control when the display result is derived to the corresponding reel will be described. When one of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R corresponding to the rotating reel is effectively detected, the stop operation position area is determined based on the number of steps from the reel reference position when the stop operation is detected. The number is specified, the stop control table of the reel where the stop operation is detected is referred, and the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the area number of the specified stop operation position is acquired. Then, control is performed to rotate and stop the reel by the number of acquired sliding frames. Specifically, from the number of steps from the reel reference position at the time when the stop operation is detected, the number of steps from the acquired number of sliding frames to the stop is calculated, and the reel is rotated and stopped by the calculated number of steps. Take control. As a result, the area corresponding to the area number that is the stop position ahead of the number of sliding frames from the area corresponding to the area number of the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected is the stop reference position (in this embodiment, the perspective window 3 It will stop in the lower symbol area).

  In the table index of this embodiment, only one address is stored as index data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state, and further, one table creation data includes one reel. Only one address is stored as the address of the storage area of the stop control table corresponding to the stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). In other words, table creation data corresponding to one internal winning state in one gaming state and stop control tables corresponding to reel stop states (and stopped positions of stopped reels) are uniquely determined. The stop control table created with reference to is unique for one internal winning state in one gaming state and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel). Therefore, when all of the gaming state, the internal winning state, and the reel stop status (and the stop position of the stopped reel) are the same, the reel is based on the same stop control table, that is, the same control pattern. The stop control is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a value of 0 to 4 is determined as the number of sliding frames, and the reel can be stopped by drawing a maximum of 4 symbols after detecting the stop operation. In other words, the stop position of the symbol can be designated from a range of a maximum of 5 frames including the stop operation position where the stop operation is detected. In addition, since it is necessary to move one frame to move the reel for one symbol, it is possible to stop the reel by pulling in a maximum of four symbols after detecting the stop operation. The symbol stop position can be designated from a range of up to five symbols including the operation position.

  In this embodiment, when any of the winning combinations is won, the winning combination is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames on the winning line, and the non-winning winning combination is drawn so that it is not aligned on the winning line. A stop control table with a defined number of frames is created and reel stop control is performed. If no winning combination is selected, a stop control table with a determined number of sliding symbols that do not have any combination And stop control of the reel. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if the winning combination can be stopped on the winning line in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. The combination that has not been performed will be controlled to be stopped in a drawing range of a maximum of 4 frames.

  When a special role is elected while the special role has been carried over from before the previous game, or when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won, such as when a special role and a small role are simultaneously won (BB (1 ) + Watermelon, BB (1) + bell, etc.), the number of sliding symbols is determined so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line, and the winning special role is won For stop operation positions that cannot be drawn into the line in the range of up to 4 frames, create a stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so that the selected small role is drawn to the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum, The reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you can't withdraw a special role that is elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, if you can align and stop the small roles that are elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line, A control is performed to stop them in a uniform manner, and a winning combination that has not been won will be controlled to be stopped within a 4-frame pull-in range. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and the small combination can be won only when the special combination cannot be drawn. When a special combination and a small combination can be drawn at the same time, only the special combination is drawn, and the small combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the special combination.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and a small role are simultaneously elected, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the small role on the winning line over the special role, and it is possible to win the special role only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. May be.

  If a special role and a replaying role are won at the same time (BB (1) + replay (1), etc.), such as when a replaying role is won while the special role has been carried over before the previous game, A stop control table in which the number of sliding symbols is determined so as to draw the selected re-gamer to the winning line in the range of four frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the symbols of the re-gamer are aligned and stopped on the winning line within a drawing range of up to four frames. In addition, as will be described later, “replay” and “bell”, which are symbols constituting the re-gamer, are arranged within 5 symbols, that is, within 4 frames, for each of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, since it can be stopped at any position within the 4-frame pull-in range, if the special player is carried over from before the previous game, the stop switch 8L by the player, Regardless of the operation timing of 8C and 8R, the re-game players will always win together. That is, in such a case, the control for aligning the re-games on the winning line has priority over the special game, and the re-games will always win. In the case where the special combination and the re-playing combination can be withdrawn at the same time, only the re-playing combination is drawn in, and the special combination is not arranged on the winning line at the same time as the re-playing combination.

  If multiple types of small roles are elected at the same time (watermelon + 1 etc.), the top of the winning small roles will be drawn as much as possible within the 4-frame range. For the stop operation position where a small number with a large number of payouts can not be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, a small number with a small number of payouts among the selected small roles A stop control table in which the number of sliding frames is determined so as to draw the winning combination into the winning line in the range of 4 frames to the maximum is created, and reel stop control is performed. As a result, when a stop operation is performed, if a small combination with a large number of payouts can be stopped among the selected small combinations that have been selected in the drawing range of up to four frames on the winning line, If control is performed to stop them together and the winning combination with a maximum of 4 frames on the winning line cannot be withdrawn, it will not be able to withdraw a small role with a large number of payouts. If it is possible to stop a combination of small winning combinations with a small number of payouts, the control is performed so that the winning combination is stopped. Control will be performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It becomes possible to win a few small roles. When a plurality of types of small combinations with different payout numbers can be drawn at the same time, only a small combination with a large number of payouts is drawn, and a plurality of types of small combinations are not aligned on the winning line at the same time.

  Special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously, such as when multiple types of small roles are elected while special roles are carried over from before the previous game, or when special roles and multiple types of small roles are elected simultaneously. (BB (1) + watermelon + 1 etc.), the number of sliding symbols is set so that the winning special role is drawn to the maximum in the range of 4 frames in the winning line. For the stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the winning line within the range of up to 4 frames, the number of sliding symbols is determined so that the winning small role with the largest number of payouts will be drawn into the winning line within the range of 4 frames. In the stop operation position where the selected special role and the small role with a large payout number among the selected small roles cannot be drawn into the winning line within a maximum of 4 frames, the payout number is small among the selected small roles Prize winning line 4 to create a stop control table number of sliding frames is determined to draw the maximum extent of the frame, performing stop control of the reels. As a result, when a special operation that has been elected within the drawing range of up to 4 frames can be stopped on the winning line when the stopping operation is performed, the control is performed to stop the winning combination. If you cannot pull in a special role that has been elected in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the line, arrange a small role with a large number of payouts out of the winning roles in the drawing range of up to 4 frames on the winning line. If it can be stopped, it will be controlled to stop them together, and special roles that have been elected within the draw range of up to 4 frames on the winning line will not be able to withdraw the small role with a large number of payouts among the selected small roles In the winning line, if you can stop a small combination with a small number of payouts out of the small combinations that have been won in the drawing range of up to 4 frames, the control will be stopped and aligned, and it will not be selected The role is a four-frame pull. So that the control to stop Te removed in range is performed. That is, in such a case, priority is given to the control for aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and it becomes possible to win the small role only when the special role cannot be withdrawn. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. It is possible to win a prize. In the case where a special role and a small role can be withdrawn at the same time, only the special role is withdrawn and the special role and the small role are not aligned on the winning line. Are drawn only with small payouts with a large number of payouts, so that a plurality of types of small roles are not arranged on the winning line at the same time.

  In this embodiment, when a special role and multiple types of small roles are selected at the same time, priority is given to the control of aligning the special role on the winning line over the small role, and only when the special role cannot be drawn. , It is possible to win a small role, and moreover, priority is given to the control of aligning a small role with a large number of payouts on the winning line over a small number with a small number of payouts among a plurality of small roles. It is possible to win a small role with a small number of payouts only when the small role cannot be withdrawn. However, priority is given to the control of aligning the small role on the winning line over the special role, as well as multiple small roles. Priority is given to the control of aligning small roles with a large number of payouts on the winning line over small roles with a small number of payouts. Of the number of payouts Only if you do not retracted also no small role, it may have made it possible to win a special role.

  Further, in this embodiment, regardless of the result of the internal lottery, the stop control in which the number of sliding symbols is set so that the combination of “watermelon-replay-replay”, which will be described later in RT transition, does not match any winning line. Create a table and perform reel stop control. Thus, when the stop operation is performed and the stop control is performed, the control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-replay-replay” which is the RT transition outcome is not aligned on any winning line. .

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a automatically stops each reel even when the reel stop operation is not performed when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed since the start of the reel rotation. Take control.

  In this embodiment, when a predetermined automatic stop time has elapsed after the start of reel rotation, if the reel is still rotating, automatic stop control is performed to automatically stop the rotating reel. However, the starting point for measuring the automatic stop time is not limited to the start of reel rotation. When the start switch 7 is operated, the reel rotates at a constant speed, and the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R. The operation may be performed when the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R disabled by the stop operation is enabled again, or when the stop operation is performed last.

  When the main CPU 41a performs the automatic stop control, the main CPU 41a performs control to stop with priority in the order of the right reel, the middle reel, and the left reel. That is, when all the reels are rotating, control is performed to stop in the order of right, middle, and left, and when any reel has already stopped, the reels that are still rotating are set to the right, middle, Control to stop in priority order in the left order. In particular, in this embodiment, a combination that is established only by stopping “black cherry”, “net cherry”, or “white cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a combination that is formed only by any one reel is determined. In the automatic stop control, control is performed to stop the reel last, except when a reel whose role is established alone is already stopped before the automatic stop control is performed.

  In addition, in the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end, refer to the stop control table of the corresponding reel as in the case of the stop operation, and respond based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R. In addition, for the reel that stops last, when the stop position corresponding to each area number is immediately stopped for every area number (the number of steps belonging to each area number is stopped with a number of steps less than one symbol. A non-winning position table indicating whether or not any of the winning positions are not aligned on the winning line, and refers to the non-winning position table at regular intervals (about 2 ms). The process of repeatedly determining whether or not the area number to which the number of steps from the reference position belongs is a non-winning position is the earliest when it is determined that the area number to which the current step number belongs is a non-winning position Control is performed to stop the reel at a stop position that can be stopped in a stage (a range of less than one frame), that is, a position where the symbol corresponding to the area number stops in the lower stage. For this reason, the last stop reel is stopped immediately without slipping more than one frame when the rotating reel reaches the non-winning position.

  The non-winning position table is set to stop the stopped reels when the two reels except the last reel are stopped after the shift to automatic stop control or when the two reels stop and shift to the automatic stop control. It is created based on the position.

  Specifically, it is determined whether or not the replay (2) has been won. If the replay (2) has been won, the reels that have already been stopped in accordance with the stop operation before the shift to the automatic stop control are performed. It is determined whether or not there is.

  If replay (2) has not been won, or if replay (2) has been won but there is a reel that has already been stopped with a stop operation before shifting to automatic stop control, the region number In order from 0 to 20, based on the stop position of the stopped reels, it is determined whether or not any combination stops on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage. If it is determined that no part of the symbol of the area number is stopped on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, the symbol of the area number is further changed to the lower stage based on the stop position of the stopped reel. When it is stopped, it is determined whether or not “watermelon-replay-replay”, which will be described later in RT transition, stops on the winning line, and when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, “watermelon-replay-replay” Replay-Replay "" Is determined not to stop on the winning line, "1" indicating the non-winning position is set as the non-winning position flag, and any symbol is displayed when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage. Is determined to stop on the winning line, or if it is determined that "watermelon replay-replay" stops on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, the non-winning position It is created by performing a process of setting “0” indicating that it is not. If “black cherry”, “net cherry” or “white cherry” is already stopped on the left reel, the black cherry, net cherry or white cherry will be displayed when the pattern of the area number is stopped at the bottom. It is determined whether or not a role other than is stopped on the winning line, and whether or not “watermelon-replay-replay” is stopped on the winning line when the symbol of the corresponding area number is stopped at the lower stage. When the symbol of the number is stopped at the bottom, if it is determined that a role other than black cherry, net cherry or white cherry does not stop on the winning line, and the symbol of the area number is stopped at the bottom, When it is determined that “Replay-Replay” does not stop on the winning line, “1” indicating the non-winning position is set as the non-winning position flag, and the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage. If it is determined that a role other than black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry stops on the winning line, or if the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, “Watermelon-Replay-Replay” appears on the winning line. If it is determined to stop, “0” indicating that the position is not a non-winning position is set.

  In addition, when Replay (2) is won and there is no reel that has already been stopped due to the stop operation before the shift to the automatic stop control, the reels of the stopped reels are sequentially ordered from the area numbers 0 to 20. Based on the stop position, when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, it is determined whether any combination stops on the winning line, and when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage If it is determined that none of the winning combinations will stop on the winning line, when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage based on the stop position of the reel that has already stopped, It is determined whether a certain “watermelon-replay-replay” stops on the winning line, and it is determined that “watermelon-replay-replay” stops on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the bottom. When Is set to “1” indicating a non-winning position as a non-winning position flag, and when it is determined that any combination is stopped on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, or When it is determined that “watermelon-replay-replay” does not stop on the winning line when the symbol of the area number is stopped at the lower stage, a process of setting “0” indicating that it is not a non-winning position It is created by doing.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control, it is ensured that none of the winning combinations are on the winning line regardless of whether or not any winning combination is won in the internal lottery. It has become. For this reason, it is possible to prevent winning by only the element of contingency, and it is possible to ensure the suppression of shooting characteristics.

  In addition, when the replay (2) is won and the reel is stopped by the automatic stop control, the stop control is performed by the stop operation, and the replay (2) is not won by the automatic stop control. When the reels are stopped, “watermelon-replay-replay” that does not stop is stopped on the winning line. That is, “watermelon-replay-replay”, which is the RT transition outcome described later, is derived on the winning line on condition that replay (2) is won and stop control is performed by automatic stop control. It has become.

  “Watermelon-Replay-Replay” means that even when Replay (2) is won and the reels are stopped by the automatic stop control, there are already stopped reels with the stop operation before the shift to the automatic stop control. In some cases, it is not derived on the winning line. In other words, “Watermelon-Replay-Replay”, which is the RT transition outcome to be described later, is on the winning line on condition that Replay (2) is won and all reels are stopped by automatic stop control. Has been derived.

  In addition, in the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops at the end, refer to the stop control table of the corresponding reel as in the case of the stop operation, and respond based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table. Control is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, and 2R to be performed. On the other hand, only the last stopped reel is identified as a stop position that does not have a role on the winning line, and control is performed to stop at the specified stop position. It has come to be. In other words, except for the reel that stops at the end, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control. However, the control is performed so that the winning combination is not arranged on any winning line. For this reason, a function to perform automatic stop control is added because it is sufficient to perform control to stop the reels in a common process regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control is performed except for the reel to be stopped last. In addition, even if a function of always causing a loss at the time of automatic stop is added, the reel stop control is not complicated accordingly.

  In addition, for the final stop reel, for every area number, if the stop position corresponding to each area number is immediately stopped, whether or not any of the roles are non-winning positions that are not aligned on the winning line is determined. A non-winning position table is created, and the non-winning position table is referenced at regular intervals (about 2 ms) shorter than the time varying by one frame, and the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is not winning Stop position that can be stopped at the earliest stage (a range of less than one frame) when it is determined that the area number to which the current step number belongs is a non-winning position by repeatedly performing the process of determining whether or not it is a position That is, the reel is controlled to stop at the position where the symbol corresponding to the area number stops at the lower stage, and when it is determined that the rotating reel is in the non-winning position, it slides one frame or more. Because it is possible to stop the display result that does not become a prize simply by stopping immediately, all the symbols within the drawing range every time the symbol moves one frame after the automatic stop time has elapsed, as before. Since there is no need to search for a non-winning position from among the above, even if a function for making sure to lose at the time of automatic stop is added in addition to the function of performing automatic stop control, the stop control of the reel is not complicated accordingly.

  In addition, after shifting to automatic stop control, the final stop reel may be controlled to stop immediately without slipping more than one frame when it is determined that the final stop reel is in the non-winning position. Since it is possible to perform stop control with a common program regardless of the number of steps at which the stop is started, the configuration of the control program associated with the automatic stop control can be simplified.

  In this embodiment, the non-winning position table is displayed when the two reels except the last reel are stopped after the shift to the automatic stop control or when the two reels are stopped and the shift to the automatic stop control is performed. The current number of steps is created by performing a process of determining whether or not the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is a non-winning position with reference to the non-winning position table at a certain interval thereafter Is preferably a non-winning position, and it is preferable that the process of determining whether the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is a non-winning position can be performed in a short time, After transitioning to automatic stop control without creating a non-winning position table, when the two reels except the last reel stopped, or when transitioning to automatic stop control after two reels stopped Based on the stop position of the reels that have been stopped at regular intervals, it is determined whether or not it is a non-winning position when it is stopped immediately with less than one frame at the current number of steps. Control may be performed to stop the reel at a stop position where it can be stopped at the earliest stage (a range of less than one frame) at the time when it is determined.

  In this embodiment, the stop control according to the winning flag is based on the stop control table according to the winning flag. However, other control methods (for example, those based on the control method) described later may be applied. Well, even when other control methods are applied in this way, control is performed according to the setting status of the winning flag regardless of whether stop operation is performed or automatic stop control other than the reel to be stopped at the end, In the case of the automatic stop control, the same effect as described above can be obtained as long as the control is performed so that only the reel to be stopped last is not aligned on any winning line.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reels 2L, 2C, and 2R based on the corresponding reel stop control table for all reels, that is, control by a table system. In the automatic stop control, except for the reel to be stopped at the end, the stop control table of the corresponding reel is referred to as in the case of the stop operation, and the response is based on the number of sliding frames in the referred stop control table. Control to stop the rotation of the reels 2L, 2C, 2R to be performed, that is, control by the table method, and for the reel to be stopped at the end, after shifting to automatic stop, other reels stop or other reels stop After that, when a transition is made to automatic stop, a non-winning position table is created and the current reference position is referenced by referring to the non-winning position table. And performs control to stop the reel at the point where the step number belongs area number from is determined to be non-winning position. For this reason, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of stop control tables for each stop mode pattern of reels that have already stopped in order to control so that the winning combination is not aligned on any winning line at the time of automatic stop, and It is possible to control so that the winning combination is not achieved by simple control only for determining whether or not the winning combination is located on any winning line.

  In this embodiment, when a stop operation is performed, all reels are controlled by the table method. In the automatic stop control, except for the reel that stops last, the table is the same as when the stop operation is performed. For reels that are controlled by the method and stop last, refer to the non-winning position table and stop the reels when it is determined that the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is the non-winning position. Regardless of whether the stop operation is performed or automatic stop control, the table method is controlled except for the reel that stops last, and the reel that stops last is due to the stop operation. If there is control by the control method, if the last reel is stopped by the stop operation, the role won by the internal lottery is not used. Controls to draw the corresponding symbol within the draw range so that it is aligned on the winning line, and kicks the symbol within the draw range so that the part not won by the internal lottery does not align on any winning line When performing the control and stopping the last reel by automatic stop, referring to the non-winning position table, it is determined that the area number to which the number of steps from the current reference position belongs is the non-winning position In this case, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table for the reel to be stopped last.

  Further, in this embodiment, a combination that is established only by stopping “black cherry”, “net cherry”, or “white cherry” on the winning line of the left reel, that is, a combination that is formed only by any one reel is determined. In the automatic stop control, control is performed to stop the reel last, except when a reel whose role is established alone is already stopped before the automatic stop control is performed. For this reason, even when a winning combination with only one of the reels is won, when the automatic stop control is performed, the order in which the reels are stopped is changed, or when the left reel is not the final stop reel, the same Since there is a possibility that the roles will be aligned in spite of automatic stop, the control for stopping the left reel may be different from the control when stopping by the stop operation, or the order of stopping the reels Since there is no need to change the automatic stop control, it is possible to make the automatic stop control always the same control. Therefore, even when a combination that is realized by only one of the reels is adopted, the reel accompanying the automatic stop is used. The stop control is not complicated.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the automatic stop control is started, the stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R from that point until at least all the reels stop (actually, they are activated in the next game). Since the detection of this operation is invalidated, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the derived display result is due to the stop operation by the player or due to the automatic stop. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the misunderstanding of the player when the reach eyes or chance eyes are derived even though the reach eyes or chance eyes are invalid due to automatic stop. .

  The main CPU 41a of this embodiment performs an abnormal winning determination that determines whether or not a combination that is not permitted in the game is on the winning line when all the reels are stopped. In the abnormal winning determination, if the winning combination is complete despite automatic stopping (excluding black cherry, net cherry or white cherry stopped before shifting to automatic stopping control), the winning combination is not found in the internal lottery. If a special combination and a general combination are collected at the same time, it is determined as an abnormal winning, and if it is determined as an abnormal winning, that is, if a combination that is not permitted in the game is won, an abnormal winning error will occur. It is controlled to an error state and the progress of the game is disabled.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the winning combination is achieved despite automatic stop (excluding black cherry, net cherry or white cherry stopped before shifting to automatic stop control), that is, some sort of automatic stop. If a prize is generated due to a malfunction due to an abnormality, the progress of the game is disabled, so that even if a prize that should not be won is generated, it will be processed as a normal prize. And the fairness of the game will not be compromised.

  In addition, when a combination that has not been won in the internal lottery or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time, that is, when a non-winning role is won or when a special role and a general role are won at the same time The data may be destroyed or an abnormal program may be running. In such a case, the progress of the game will be disabled, and the fairness of the game will be impaired. There is no.

  In this embodiment, once controlled to an error state due to an abnormal winning error, it is not canceled even if the reset switch 23 or the reset / setting switch 38 is operated, and the main CPU 41a in the area of the RAM 41c. All areas except for the area in use are initialized, cannot be restored to the original state, and are not canceled until a new set value is set in the setting change mode described above. In other words, when an unacceptable winning combination wins due to garbled data or abnormal program operation, it is not the setting value automatically set by the slot machine, but the setting selected and set based on the setting change operation Since it is ensured that the game is played based on the value (generally, the setting change operation is performed by an employee of the game shop, which is the set value selected by the game shop), the game is fair. be able to.

  As in this example, when special roles and small roles are won at the same time, if a stop operation is made at the timing when the drawing pattern of the winning special roles and the winning symbols are overlapped In addition, in the case of controlling the drawing of the special role composition pattern over the small role composition symbol, the special role composition symbol is not drawn and the small role composition symbol is drawn, and the small role is won. In this case, there is a problem that the winning of the special role that may be won simultaneously will be denied, and even if a small role that has the possibility of winning simultaneously is won, the winning of the special role cannot be expected. On the other hand, if a special role and a small role are elected at the same time, the constituent symbols of the special role will be drawn in preference to the constituent symbols of the small role, and the selected small role will be missed, which is disadvantageous to the player. There is a problem that will occur.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, for the left and middle reels, the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on one of the winning lines, and BB (1), BB The display mode in which the “Black 7” symbol constituting (2) stops on any of the winning lines, and the “Watermelon” symbol and the “Black 7” The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position at which symbols can be aimed at the same time. In addition, for the right reel, a display mode in which the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon stops on any winning line, and the “white 7” symbol constituting the BB (1) stops on any winning line. The display mode, the display mode in which the “Black 7” symbol constituting BB (2) stops on any of the winning lines, is arranged beyond the four frames that are the maximum drawing range, The arrangement is such that there is no stop operation position at which the “white 7” symbol can be aimed simultaneously, and no stop operation positions at which the “watermelon” symbol and “black 7” symbol can be aimed at simultaneously.

  In the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, that is, BB (1) or BB (2) and a watermelon that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time can be won simultaneously. Even if a watermelon that may be won at the same time as BB (1) or BB (2) wins, the winning of BB (1) or BB (2) will not be denied and can be won at the same time. When a characteristic watermelon wins, the expectation for winning of BB (1) or BB (2) can be reliably increased. Furthermore, even if BB (1) or BB (2) and watermelon are won at the same time, winning due to the fact that the constituent symbols of BB (1) and BB (2) are drawn in preference to the constituent symbols of watermelon It is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the simultaneous winning of BB (1) or BB (2) and the watermelon.

  On the left, a display mode in which the “black cherry” symbol constituting the black cherry stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol constituting the BB (2) stops on any winning line The display mode is arranged over the maximum drawing range of 4 frames, and there is no stop operation position that can simultaneously aim for the “black cherry” symbol and the “black 7” symbol, and the internal lottery BB (2) + black cherry, that is, BB (2) and black cherry that do not have a stop operation position that can be aimed at the same time can be won at the same time, so black that may be won at the same time as BB (2) Even if a cherry wins, the winning of BB (2) will not be denied, and when a black cherry that may win at the same time wins, the period for winning of BB (2) It is possible to increase the feeling surely. In addition, even if BB (2) and black cherry are selected at the same time, it is not possible to miss the winning black cherry because the BB (2) configuration pattern is drawn in preference to the black cherry configuration pattern. In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged due to the simultaneous winning of BB (2) and black cherry.

  On the other hand, in the internal lottery, BB (1) or BB (2) and one can be won at the same time, and for all reels, the symbols constituting one ("Black 7" symbol on the left and right reels, In the reel, the “black cherry” symbol) stops on one of the winning lines, and the symbols that make up BB (1) and BB (2) (left, middle reel “black 7” symbol, right reel The display mode in which “White 7” symbol in the case of BB (1) and “Black 7” symbol in the case of BB (2) stops on one of the winning lines and within the 4 frames that is the maximum drawing range There is a stop operation position at which the symbols constituting one sheet and the symbols constituting BB (1) and BB (2) can be aimed simultaneously.

  However, in this embodiment, one is always selected simultaneously with the watermelon, and for all reels, the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon and the symbols that constitute the BB (1) and BB (2) are either The display mode that stops on the winning line, the display mode that the symbols constituting one piece stop on any of the winning lines, are arranged beyond the four frames that are the maximum drawing range, and constitutes a watermelon. The "watermelon" symbol is a sequence that does not have stop operation positions that can simultaneously target the symbol "watermelon" and the symbols that make up BB (1) and BB (2). Expected value (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1) Sum of winning probabilities Value multiplied by the number of watermelons to be paid out) is the expected payout value (watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + BB (1), when the stop operation is aimed at the “watermelon” symbol that makes up the watermelon by making it higher than the value of the sum of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 and the number of payouts) , BB (2) can be obtained more medals than when the stop operation is performed aiming at the symbol constituting one symbol. As a result, the stop operation aiming at the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon, that is, the symbol that constitutes one of the display modes in which the symbol that constitutes BB (1) and BB (2) stops on any winning line It is possible to prompt a stop operation at a timing at which the display mode that stops on any winning line does not stop, and the configuration symbols of BB (1) and BB (2) are not drawn and one configuration symbol is displayed. BB (1) and BB (2), which may be won at the same time when one of them is won, can be prevented from being denied. By winning the prize, it is possible to avoid the problem that the winning of the special role cannot be expected.

  In addition, BB (2), net cherry, and white cherry can be won simultaneously, and for the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on any winning line, white cherry The display mode in which the “white cherry” symbols that make up stop on any of the winning lines and the display mode in which the “black 7” symbols that make up BB (2) stop on any of the winning lines It is arranged within the range of 4 frames, and there is a stop operation position that can simultaneously aim for the symbols constituting the net cherry and white cherry and the symbols constituting BB (2).

  However, in this embodiment, for the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on one of the winning lines and the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon is on any of the winning lines. Stop operation position that can aim at the display mode to stop at the same time, the display mode in which the "white cherry" symbol that constitutes the white cherry stops on any winning line and the "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon on any winning line The stop operation position at which the display mode that stops at the same time is simultaneously displayed, the display mode in which the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry stops on any winning line, and the “black 7” symbol that constitutes BB (2) Stop operation position that can simultaneously aim at the display mode that stops on any winning line, the “white cherry” pattern that makes up the white cherry is on any winning line "Net cherry" that does not overlap the display mode to stop and the stop operation position at which the "black 7" symbol constituting the watermelon can simultaneously aim on any winning line, and further constitutes net cherry Expected payout (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2 ) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + sum of the winning probabilities and the number of watermelon payouts, net cherry, BB (2) + net cherry winning probabilities and net cherry payout Aiming at the same time for the “white cherry” symbol that makes up the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol that makes up the watermelon, the sum of the number of sheets (substantially two to be stopped at the top or bottom). Stop operation Expected payout value (watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability Value multiplied by the number of watermelons to be paid out, the sum of white cherries, BB (2) + white cherries winning probability, and the number of white cherries to be paid out (substantially two because they always stop at the top or bottom) (The sum of the value multiplied by) and the expected payout value when the stop operation is performed simultaneously aiming at the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry and the “black 7” symbol constituting BB (2) ( The net cherry, BB (2) + net cherry winning total and the number of net cherries paid out (a value that is essentially two in order to stop at the top or bottom) are multiplied by white cherry. "Black 7" that makes up the "White Cherry" design and BB (2) ”Expected payout when the stop operation is aimed at the same time (white cherry, BB (2) + white cherry winning probability combined value and white cherry payout number (substantially because it stops at the top or bottom) The value obtained by multiplying 2) is higher than the value obtained by multiplying 2) and simultaneously aiming at the "net cherry" symbol that constitutes the net cherry or the "white cherry" symbol that constitutes the white cherry and the "watermelon" symbol that constitutes the watermelon. The person who performed the stop operation aims at the “net cherry” symbol that constitutes the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol that constitutes the white cherry and the “black 7” symbol that constitutes the BB (2) at the same time. You can get more medals than you do. As a result, the “net cherry” symbol constituting the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol constituting the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol constituting the watermelon are simultaneously stopped, that is, “black 7” constituting the BB (2). It is possible to prompt a stop operation at a timing at which the display mode in which the symbol stops on one of the winning lines does not stop, and net cherry or white cherry is pulled in without the BB (2) component symbol being pulled in. It is possible to prevent the winning of BB (2), which may win simultaneously when net cherry or white cherry wins, so that a small role that may win simultaneously wins. You can avoid the problem that you won't be able to win a special role.

  Also, in this embodiment, black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is selected, reels other than the left reel are set as the first stop, and stop at the timing when the “watermelon” symbol can be drawn on any winning line. When an operation is performed, the “Watermelon” symbol is stopped on one of the winning lines, and the second stop is also other than the left reel, and the “Watermelon” symbol is displayed on the stopped reel. If a stop operation is performed at the timing of drawing on the stopped winning line, the “watermelon” symbol is stopped on the winning line, so that the “watermelon” Depending on whether or not the symbol stops on the winning line, it can be determined whether the watermelon has stopped, or whether black cherry, net cherry or white cherry has been won. Even in such a case, in the left reel, the “net cherry” symbol that constitutes the net cherry or the “white cherry” symbol that constitutes the white cherry and the “watermelon” symbol that constitutes the watermelon are stopped simultaneously. The operation, that is, the display operation in which the “black 7” symbols constituting the BB (2) are stopped on any of the winning lines can be urged to stop at the timing when the BB (2) does not stop. It is possible to effectively prevent BB (2) winning that may be won simultaneously when net cherries or white cherries are pulled in without drawing the constituent symbols and net cherries or white cherries win. .

  In the conventional slot machine, the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination is selected independently and the reel stop control pattern used when the small combination and special combination are simultaneously selected are different from each other. Although the winning of the special role can be determined accordingly, it did not suggest any information other than the winning of the special role depending on the stop mode of the reel. In addition, in the conventional slot machine, since the stop mode at the time of winning a small role alone is different from the stop mode at the time of simultaneous winning of a small role and a special role, is the special role won according to the stop mode? If the player is able to determine whether or not he / she has not won the special role, there is a problem that the expectation is lost.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected. When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' can be drawn into the winning line, control is performed to align the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' on the winning line. When BB (1) + watermelon and BB (2) + watermelon are selected, among the stop operation positions where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, “watermelon-watermelon” -Stop at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon" can be aligned only with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 and the stop operation position where it can be aligned with any of the winning lines L1-L5 When an operation is performed, control is performed to align the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, and the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned only to the winning lines L4 and L5. In order to perform control for aligning the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” to the winning lines L4, L5 only when the stop operation is performed at the stopping operation position that cannot be aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3. On the other hand, if watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet is selected, the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line Among the various stop operation positions, the stop operation position and the winning ra When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be aligned with any of L1 to L5, control is performed to align the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” with the winning lines L4, L5. The combination of "watermelon-watermelon" can be aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, L3, and only when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that cannot be aligned to the winning lines L4, L5, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" ”Is adjusted to match the winning lines L1, L2, and L3.

  In other words, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon was selected, and the stop operation was performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. In this case, the control of aligning the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” with priority over the winning lines L1, L2, L3 over the winning lines L4, L5 is performed, so that watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” when “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” is selected at the stop operation position where the combination of “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. Is controlled so as to preferentially align the winning lines L4, L5 over the winning lines L1, L2, L3.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 16A, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is selected, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1. , L2 and L3 are highly likely to be matched, and if "Watermelon + 1", BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 and BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 is selected, "Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon" combination Are likely to be aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5. That is, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon wins, the watermelon wins, watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1 The winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different from the case where the watermelon wins when the sheet is won.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (1), in the internal lottery, the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon (A + C + E) ) BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon winning probability total value (A + C) than the ratio of watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1 BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet and BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability total value (B + D) in the combined value (B + D + F) of the winning probability of watermelon, BB (1 ) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet.

  As a result, BB (1) or BB (2), that is, winning at the same time as the special role is better when the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time than when the watermelon is won alone. Since the percentage of the winning line will increase, the special line will depend on whether the winning line with the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. Can change the player's expectation of winning.

  Furthermore, there is a possibility that a special role will be won regardless of whether the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. However, it is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line that includes a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” Regardless of which winning line is arranged, the player's expectation that the special role is won will not be lost.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (2), in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon (A + C) BB (2) occupying the combined value (B + D) of the winning probabilities of BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 than the ratio of winning probability (C) of BB (2) + watermelon BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet with the probability that the winning probability (D) of + watermelon + 1 sheet will be high A lottery is held.

  As a result, BB (2), that is, more medals than BB (1) when one watermelon and one piece of watermelon are won at the same time than when watermelon and one piece are won alone. Since the ratio of winning the winning combination at the same time as the special role that can be expected will increase, the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4 , L5, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2).

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether BB (1) is won or BB (2) is won from the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. Even if the combination of “watermelon-watermelon” is aligned on any winning line, the player's expectation for winning BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2), will be lost. There is nothing.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16B- (3), in the internal lottery, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon when the set value is 1 to 3 , BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet when the set value is 4-6 rather than the ratio of the combined value (B1 + D1 + F1) of the winning probability of + watermelon + 1 sheet , BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 watermelon occupying the combined value of winning probabilities (A2 + B2 + C2 + D2 + E2 + F2) +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) with the probability that the ratio of the winning probability (B2 + D2 + F2) will increase + Watermelon + 1 lottery.

  As a result, the setting values 4 to 6, that is, the settings 1 to 3 are set when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than when the watermelon is elected alone. Since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than in the case where it is set is increased, the winning lines including the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. It can be estimated whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player, depending on whether there is a pay line L4 or L5.

  Furthermore, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 are set as the setting value or the settings 4 to 6 are set from the winning line in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is arranged. Regardless of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in any winning line, the player's sense of expectation that settings 4-6 having higher advantages among the settings 1-6 are set is impaired. There is no end.

  In this embodiment, the lottery of watermelon, watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 is selected in the internal lottery. When BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 May be won at the same time as BB (1) or BB (2).

  Further, in this embodiment, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet and a plurality of types of BBs are won simultaneously, but only watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet and one type of BB may be won simultaneously.

  In this embodiment, BB (2) can acquire more medals out of BB (1) and BB (2), but BB out of BB (1) and BB (2). (1) may be configured such that more medals can be obtained.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are selected, and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed, the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is easy to align with the winning lines L1, L2, L3, watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 Is selected, and when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is the winning line L4, It is easy to align with L5, but watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is elected, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) It is sufficient if the winning line that is easy to align is different depending on whether one watermelon is selected or not. For example, it is easy to align with a specific winning line in one case, and a different winning line from a specific winning line in the other case. The configuration may be easily aligned.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are selected, and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is a stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line. When a stop operation is performed, control is performed so that the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, L3 at a higher rate than the winning lines L4, L5, and +1 watermelon, BB (1) + If watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, The control is performed so that the combination of “-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning lines L4, L5 at a higher rate than the winning lines L1, L2, L3, but the watermelon, BB (1) When a watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is selected and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” ”Is adjusted so that only the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are aligned. Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and“ Watermelon-Watermelon- When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the control of aligning the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination only to the winning lines L4 and L5 may be performed. good.

  Further, in this embodiment, the winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon in the total value of the winning probability of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon in the internal lottery. BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon in the combined value of the winning ratio of the combined value and the winning probability of watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is selected, stop operation that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" to the winning line When stop operation is performed at the position, and watermelon + Sheets, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected, and the stop operation is possible at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line. By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned is different from the case where it was made, the player's expectation for winning the special role will change due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' However, in the internal lottery, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 occupies the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + occupying the sum of the winning probabilities of sheets, BB (2) + watermelon + 1, and the winning probabilities of watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon watermelon BB (2) + watermelon winning probability of the combined value of the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is selected when a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled in, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon The winning combination with the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is controlled by controlling the winning line to be preferentially aligned between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the can be drawn into the winning line line Depending on the difference, the player's expectation for winning the special role may be changed.

  Also, in the internal lottery, the sum of the winning probabilities of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 in the combined value of winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 Ratio of value and BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon winning probability The ratio of the sum of the values of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet A lottery will be held and watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 will be selected, and will stop at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line When operation is performed, watermelon + 1 sheet, B (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon is elected, and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line; By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned in the game is different, the player's expectation for winning the special role will be changed by the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon ''. May be.

  In addition, in the internal lottery, the sum of the winning probabilities of BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon in the sum of winning probabilities of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon Ratio of values and winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 in the combined value of winning probability of watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 The ratio of the sum of the values of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet A lottery will be held and watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon will be selected and stop at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line When operation is performed, watermelon + 1 sheet, B (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 is selected, and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line; By controlling so that the winning line that is preferentially aligned in the game is different, the player's expectation for winning the special role will be changed by the difference in the winning line with the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon ''. May be.

  Further, in this embodiment, the ratio of winning probability of BB (2) + watermelon in the total value of winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon and BB (2) + watermelon in the internal lottery and BB (1) + watermelon BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) with a probability that the ratio of BB (2) + watermelon + 1 winning probability to the combined value of winning probability of +1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 + Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet lottery, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is elected, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "" can be drawn into the winning line, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected. Pull the watermelon-watermelon combination to the winning line Depending on the difference in the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned, control is performed so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is performed at the position where the stop operation is possible. It is possible to change the player's expectation level for winning BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2), but in the internal lottery, BB (1) + Watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1The percentage of winning probability of BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 in the combined value of winning probability and BB (1) + Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + Watermelon BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (with a probability that the ratio of winning probability of BB (2) + watermelon occupying the total value of winning probability is different 2) + watermelon + 1 lottery BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 was selected, and a stop operation was performed at a stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" could be drawn into the winning line And BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon are selected, and the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. BB (1) and BB (2) are more advantageous due to the difference in the winning line with the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to change the player's expectation for winning BB (2) with a high degree.

  In the present embodiment, in the internal lottery, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB when the set value is 1 to 3. (2) The set value is 4 rather than the ratio of the sum of the winning probabilities of watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, and BB (2) + watermelon + 1 in the sum of winning probabilities of (2) + watermelon + 1 Occupies the combined value of winning probabilities for watermelon, watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet winning probability, the ratio of watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB ( 1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2 + Watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is selected, stop operation that can draw the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" to the winning line When a stop operation is performed at the position, and one watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 and BB (2) + watermelon + 1 are selected, and the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" is on the winning line By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position where it can be pulled in, depending on the difference in the winning line where the combination of `` watermelon-watermelon-watermelon '' is aligned It can be estimated whether or not the set value is advantageous to the player. In the internal lottery, the watermelon and watermelon + Sheets, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + watermelon in the combined value of winning probabilities, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon winning probability of the sum of the set value is 4-6 watermelon, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2 ) + Watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + watermelon occupying the sum of the winning probability of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon , Watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet, lottery + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + Watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet are elected, "Watermelon- When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, and watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are selected. -By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon-watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line, and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line in which the combination of "is complete.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon + 1 watermelon occupying the combined value of the winning probability of +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + the set value is 1 to 3 than the ratio of the combined value of the watermelon winning probability Alternatively, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 when the set value is any one of 4 to 6 Watermelon + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) with the probability that the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon in the combined value of the winning probability of the sheets + Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon BB (2) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet won, winning the combination of "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position that can be pulled into the line, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are selected, and "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" The combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” has been prepared by controlling the winning line to be preferentially aligned between when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination can be drawn into the winning line. It may be possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on a difference in the pay line.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon + 1 watermelon +1 in the total value of winning probabilities, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 winning probability, the set value is 1 ~ 3 or set value is 4 ~ 6 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 watermelon occupying the combined value of the winning probability of 1 watermelon + 1 watermelon, watermelon + 1 at the probability that the ratio of the combined value of the winning probability of BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB 2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon is elected, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" combination When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the player can be drawn into the winning line, the watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are selected. -By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line, and the "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line with the combination.

  In addition, when the set value is 1 to 3 or the set value is 4 to 6, the watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon , BB (2) + watermelon + 1 piece of watermelon +1 occupancy probability, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 piece, BB (2) + watermelon winning probability of the sum of the set value is 1 ~ 3 or set value is 4 ~ 6 Watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + Watermelon + 1 watermelon in the combined value of winning probability of watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet with the probability that the combined value of winning probability of BB (2) + watermelon will be high, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB 2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 lottery, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 is selected, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" combination When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the player can be drawn into the winning line, the watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon are selected, and “Watermelon-Watermelon -By controlling so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs between when the stop operation is made at the stop operation position where the combination of "watermelon" can be drawn into the winning line, and the "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" It may be possible to infer whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player based on the difference in the winning line with the combination.

  Also, in this embodiment, regardless of whether BB (1) or BB (2) is won, the set value is given to the player by the difference in the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon”. It is possible to infer whether or not the set value is advantageous, but in the internal lottery, when the set value is 1 to 3, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet , BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + the ratio of the winning probabilities of BB (1) + watermelon + 1 and BB (2) + watermelon + 1 BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet winning probability when the set value is 4 to 6 (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet BB (1) + watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 The ratio of the winning probability of watermelon + 1 to the combined value of the winning probability of watermelon and watermelon + 1 when the value is 1-3, and the winning probability of watermelon + watermelon + 1 when the set value is 4-6 Watermelon + watermelon + 1 lottery with the probability that the winning probability of watermelon + 1 in the value will be the same, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is won , When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 is winning, Control may be made so that the winning line to be preferentially aligned differs from when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line. By setting the BB (1) or BB (2) to be won at the same time, the set value is advantageous to the player due to the difference in the winning line with the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination. It becomes possible to infer whether or not it is a set value.

  Also, in this embodiment, the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match is different between the case where the setting value is the setting 1 to 3 and the case where the setting is the setting 4 to 6. As long as at least one set value among a plurality of different set values and at least one other set value have different winning lines where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to match.

  Further, in this embodiment, when BB (1) or BB (2) is elected, BB (1) and BB (2) among the winning lines L1 to L5 are more advantageous. In the case where (2) is won and the setting 4 to 6 having higher advantage among the settings 1 to 6 is set, the winning line L4, in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easily arranged, By making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easy to align in L5, there is a high possibility that the BB has been won, and there is a high possibility that the BB with a high advantage has been won, and the advantage is high. This suggests that there is a high possibility that the set value is set, and it is preferable because the player's expectation of being in an advantageous state when the watermelon wins can be sharpened. BB (1 Or, when BB (2) is won, among the winning lines L1 to L5, among BB (1) and BB (2), which is more advantageous, BB (2) is won, or In the case where at least one of the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 is set, the winning line is different from the winning line where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easily arranged By making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easier, even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that BB (1) or BB (2) has won, It is suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility of setting or a setting value having a high advantage is set, and the possibility that the BB having a high advantage is elected or a high advantage is obtained. Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the set values has been set, it is suggested that the BB is likely to be elected. Even if suggested, it can be expected to be advantageous on the other side.

  In addition, in the case where BB (2) having higher advantage is elected among BB (1) and BB (2), BB (1) or BB (2) is won among the winning lines L1 to L5. Or at least one of the settings 4 to 6 having a higher advantage among the settings 1 to 6, and a winning line in which the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is easy to align Even if there is no suggestion that a highly advantageous BB is likely to be won by making the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination easy to match on different winning lines, BB (1) or BB ( 2) It is suggested that there is a high possibility of winning or that a setting value with high advantage is set, and BB (1) or BB (2) is winning. Have Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of the possibility or a setting value with a high advantage is set, it is suggested that a BB with a high advantage is highly likely to be elected Therefore, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other hand.

  Further, in the case where settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set, BB (1) or BB (2) among the winning lines L1 to L5 is won, or A winning line that facilitates the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” in at least one of BB (1) and BB (2), where BB (2) is more advantageous Even if there is no suggestion that there is a high possibility that a highly advantageous setting value is set by making the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” easy on different winning lines, BB (1) or BB It is suggested that there is a high possibility that (2) is a winning BB or a highly advantageous BB is winning, and BB (1) or BB (2) is winning. Have Even if it is not suggested that there is a high possibility that at least one of BBs with high possibility or advantage is won, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that a set value with high advantage is set. Therefore, even if a disadvantageous possibility is suggested on the one hand, an advantageous possibility can be expected on the other hand.

  In this embodiment, as described later, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, the chance is higher than the winning lines L4 and L5. If the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are controlled so that watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won and the watermelon is missed, the winning line is won Control that aligns with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than L1, L2, and L3 is performed, and even if a watermelon is missed, there is a possibility that BB has won, BB with high advantage It is possible to determine the difference between the possibility of winning the game and the possibility of setting a highly advantageous setting value, but the chance that the chance line is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. L4 If the ratio of L5 is equal to watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon won and lost watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + It may be controlled to be equal to the case where the watermelon + 1 is won and the watermelon is missed. By doing so, when the watermelon wins, the possibility that the BB has won, the advantage While it is possible to determine the difference between the possibility that a high BB has been won and the possibility that a highly advantageous setting value has been set, if the watermelon is missed, the BB may have been won If you play a game without dropping the watermelon, you will not be able to determine the difference between the possibility that the BB with high performance and advantage is won and the possibility that the setting value with high advantage is set. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes a small role notification effect for notifying that effect when the small role is won. Since the small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate when the special role is elected than when the special role is not elected, the small role announcement production is executed and the special role is won. This suggests the possibility of doing so.

  In addition, the small role notification effect includes a first small role notification effect and a second small role notification effect, and the sub CPU 91a selects one of the selected small type notification effects when executing the small role notification effect. Perform small role announcement production. At this time, when the special role is won, the ratio of the second small role notification effect being selected is higher than when the special role is not won, so the second small role notification effect is executed. Then, it is suggested that there is a higher possibility of winning the special role than when the first small role notification effect is executed.

  In addition, since the ratio of the second small role announcement effect is higher when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected at the same time than when the watermelon is elected alone, the watermelon At the time of winning, there is a possibility that a BB suggested by a winning line with a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” has been won, a possibility that a BB with high advantage has been won, and a setting value with high advantage The possibility of being set and the type of small role announcement effect are linked, and BB winning, high BB winning, and high advantageous setting value are set according to the display mode and effect of these reels. It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation of being present.

  Further, when executing the small role notification effect, the sub CPU 91a selects the start timing, and starts the small role notification effect from the selected timing. There are four start timings at the start of the game, at the first stop, at the second stop, and at the third stop. When the special role is won, the ratio at which the third stop is selected is Since the ratio decreases in the order of the second stop, the first stop, and the start of the game, it seems that the possibility of winning the special role is the highest when starting from the third stop It is suggested that the possibility decreases in the order of the third stop, the second stop, and the first stop.

  Also, the ratio of the third stop and the second stop is higher when the watermelon and one are selected at the same time than when the watermelon is won alone among the watermelon and one. , The possibility of winning the BB suggested by the winning line with the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” at the time of winning the watermelon, the possibility of winning the BB with high advantage, the setting value with high advantage Is linked to the start timing of the small role announcement production, and BB wins, high BB wins, high preference settings depending on the display mode of these reels and the start timing of the production. It is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the value is set.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you miss any part, if you do not win any of the winning combinations, you can change the stop mode of the reel by stopping the specific stop mode that will not stop, but stop at the same timing There is only one type of specific stop mode that stops when a specific combination is missed by performing an operation, and there is a problem that the stop mode of the reel becomes monotonous.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (3) + watermelon are selected, and the stop operation is not performed at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line. “Black 7 / Net 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Black 7 / Net” except “Black 7-Black 7-Black 7” “Black 7-Black 7-White 7” “Watermelon-Watermelon-Watermelon” 7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Black 7 / White 7 / Watermelon ”(hereinafter referred to as“ chance ”) is controlled so that the winning lines L1, L2, L3 are preferentially aligned over the winning lines L4, L5. +1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 and BB (2) + watermelon + 1 are selected, and a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” cannot be drawn into the winning line. In the case of winning line L1, L , And it performs the control to align in preference to pay line L4, L5 than L3.

  Therefore, even if watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are elected, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet won Even if the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is stopped at the stop operation position where the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line, the combination “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” If the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon are elected, that is, if only one watermelon is elected alone and loses watermelon, If chances are likely to be on the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, if watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won, that is, watermelon, 1 sheet Both If you missed the watermelon are sometimes elected, the chance eyes is likely to align to the winning line L4, L5.

  As a result, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is elected and watermelon is lost, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet Since the winning line where chances are easy to match is different from when winning a watermelon because of winning, the reel stop mode when a watermelon is missed can be diversified.

  The chances were that the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon won and dropped the watermelon, watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon If the +1 card is won and the watermelon is missed, it is controlled so that it will be aligned to any winning line, and if these roles or combinations of roles are not winning, chances will be to which winning line Are not even available. For this reason, the possibility of winning the BB is surely suggested when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, BB (1) or BB (2) is the case where one watermelon and one watermelon are elected at the same time, rather than the case where the watermelon is elected alone. ), That is, the percentage of winning at the same time as the special role will increase, so it is special depending on whether the winning line with the chance chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5. It is possible to change the player's expectation for winning the role. Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, it is suggested that the special role may be won. It is impossible to determine whether or not a special role has been won from a winning line with uniform eyes, and a player who wins a special role regardless of which winning line is matched The feeling of expectation will not be spoiled.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, BB (2), that is, BB (, in the case where one watermelon and one watermelon are elected at the same time, compared with the case where one watermelon is elected alone, as described above. Since the ratio of winning at the same time as special roles that can be expected to win more medals than 1) will increase, whether the winning line with the chance chance is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line Depending on whether it is L4 or L5, it is possible to change the player's expectation for winning BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2). Furthermore, even if the winning line with the chances is the winning line L1, L2, L3 or the winning line L4, L5, there is a possibility that either BB (1) or BB (2) is won. However, it is impossible to determine whether BB (1) is won or BB (2) is won from the winning line where chances are aligned. Even when the lines are aligned, the player's expectation for winning BB (2), which is more advantageous among BB (1) and BB (2), is not impaired.

  Further, in this embodiment, as described above, the setting values 4 to 6 are set when the watermelon and one of the watermelons are elected simultaneously rather than the case where the watermelon is elected at the same time. That is, since the ratio of setting values that are more advantageous to the player than when the settings 1 to 3 are set is increased, the winning lines with the same chance chance are the winning lines L1, L2, and L3. Or the winning lines L4 and L5, it can be estimated whether or not the set value is a set value advantageous to the player. Further, it is impossible to determine whether the setting values 1 to 3 or the settings 4 to 6 are set as the set values from the winning lines with the chances aligned, and any winning line is determined based on the chances. Even in the case where all of the settings are aligned, the player's expectation that the settings 4 to 6 having higher advantages among the settings 1 to 6 are set is not impaired.

  In this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is won and watermelon is dropped, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) When + watermelon + 1 is won and the watermelon is missed, the winning line where chances are easy to match is changed, but the chance 1 and chance 2 with different display modes are defined, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon won and watermelon was missed, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet won and watermelon You may make it change the type of the chance eye which is easy to appear in the case of missing.

  In this embodiment, when the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is missed, the winning line L1, L5 is higher than the winning lines L4, L5. When the control to align L2 and L3 is performed, and watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet is won and the watermelon is overlooked, the winning line L1, L2, Control is made to align with the winning lines L4 and L5 at a higher rate than L3, but if watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon wins and loses watermelon, chances When the control is performed so that the eyes are aligned only to the winning lines L1, L2, and L3, if watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon +1 sheet is won and the watermelon is dropped Winning eye line L4, it may be performed L5 only align control.

  Also, in this embodiment, when watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon is won and the watermelon is dropped, watermelon +1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon +1 sheet, BB (2) When + watermelon + 1 is elected and watermelon is missed, different chances are easily derived, but watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon +1 If you win and lose a watermelon, and if you win a watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon wins and loses a watermelon, you can make it easier to derive different opportunities. Watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 wins and watermelon is lost and watermelon +1, BB (1) + watermelon +1, BB (2) + watermelon wins Take watermelon If the chances are different, the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon won and the watermelon is dropped, and the watermelon + 1 sheet, BB ( 1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 may be chosen so that different chances are easily derived when the watermelon is missed.

  Also, in this embodiment, the ratio of winning at the same time as the special role is higher in the case where the watermelon and one piece are won at the same time than in the case where the watermelon is won alone in the watermelon and one piece. Therefore, BB winning, winning BB winning, setting with high advantage depending on whether the winning line with the chance chance is winning line L1, L2, L3 or winning line L4, L5 Although the player's expectation level for the set value is changed, for example, when the chance line is aligned with any winning line, the process shifts to RT described later and the chance line Shifts to the first RT when the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 are aligned, and the first RT is advantageous when the chances are aligned to the winning lines L4 and L5 (RT end condition, replay The winning probability of the role, It may be configured to shift to the second RT having a different type of presence / absence notification or notification ratio), and such a configuration only diversifies the display mode of the reel when a watermelon is missed. In addition, even in the display mode where the same chances are aligned on the winning line, if the watermelon is won alone, RT that may shift when watermelon is missed and watermelon + 1 is won In the case where the watermelon is missed, the advantage can be changed by the RT which may shift.

  In conventional slot machines, the reel stop control pattern used when winning a specific role that may be missed is different from the reel stop control pattern used when none of the roles are won. If you missed a certain role, there is something that suggests that you will miss a specific role by stopping a specific stop mode that will not stop if no role is elected, but when you miss a specific role If the player does not know the specific stopping mode to be stopped, he cannot know that he / she has missed the elected special role, and in such a case, he simply missed the elected special role. It is difficult to determine whether or not

  Therefore, in this embodiment, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won and the first stop When a stop operation is performed at a stop operation position where “watermelon” cannot be pulled into the winning line at the time (when any reel is stopped while all reels are changing), “Black 7”, “ Control is performed to draw either “net 7” or “white 7” into one of the winning lines, and “watermelon” is added to the stopped winning line of “black 7”, “net 7” or “white 7” in the remaining reels. When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the player can pull in the "watermelon", the "watermelon" is controlled to be drawn into the stopped winning line of "black 7," "net 7," or "white 7." . Also, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet will be selected and either “Watermelon” stops on the winning line, but “Watermelon” stops at the first stop when the second stop (when one of the two reels is changing and one reel is stopped) Even if the “watermelon” cannot be stopped at the stop line where the “watermelon” is stopped at the second stop time because the stop operation has been performed at the stop operation position that cannot be drawn into the selected pay line, When one of the reels is fluctuating and the last reel is stopped), it stops at the stop operation position where “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line where “watermelon” stopped at the first stop. If the operation is performed, and performs a control to draw "watermelon" in pay lines stopped in "watermelon" during the first stop.

  That is, even if the watermelon is dropped out at the time of the first stop or the second stop, when the stop operation is performed at the stop operation position where the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels, the “watermelon-watermelon- Control to align a part of the combination of “watermelon” to the winning line is performed.

  Therefore, watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won, (2) Even if a watermelon is dropped out at the time of stopping, a part of the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination when the remaining reel is stopped at a stop operation position where the “watermelon” can be pulled into the winning line. Will match the winning line, so even if you drop out the watermelon during the first stop or the second stop, depending on whether or not a part of the “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” combination is aligned with the winning line, It is possible to easily determine whether or not an error has been missed.

  In this embodiment, the watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (1) + watermelon + 1 sheet, BB (2) + watermelon + 1 sheet are won, If the watermelon is missed at the time of the stop or the second stop, it will be an index symbol (“Black 7”, “Net 7” or “White 7” if it is missed at the first stop, In this case, the “watermelon” stopped at the first stop is regarded as the stop position where the “watermelon” has stopped, and stop control is performed using the stop control table used when the watermelon has not been dropped. For this reason, a stop control table for stopping the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” on the winning line, and a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop Since there is no need to prepare a separate stop control table for stopping a part of the winning line on the winning line, a combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” can be used when a watermelon is dropped during the first stop or the second stop. The storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced even when control is performed to align part of the winning lines.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a has at least a winning combination of watermelon, BB (1) + watermelon, BB (2) + watermelon, watermelon + 1, BB (1) + watermelon + 1, BB (2) + watermelon + 1. It is preferable to notify that the watermelon has been won or the possibility by the time of the second stop. As a result, if the watermelon has been elected at the time of the first stop or the second stop, the fact that the watermelon has been won, or the possibility of that being announced, the “watermelon” can be drawn into the winning line for the remaining reels. A stop operation is performed at the stop operation position, and it becomes possible to determine whether or not a watermelon has been dropped depending on whether or not a part of the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” is aligned with the winning line. Thus, in the case where there are a plurality of combinations that do not have stop operation positions that can be pulled in simultaneously, that is, there are a plurality of combinations that miss one when aiming at one, it is possible to accurately determine which combination has been missed.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a has the same lottery probabilities for the special role and the small role after the end of the BB accompanying the winning of the BB (1) (2), but the replay (1) and the replay (2). ) Has a higher probability than the normal gaming state, and the payout rate of medals per game (winning probability of the target role × total number of payouts / number of bets required for one game) is 1. Control over replay time (1) (RT (1)) exceeding. Then, RT (1) does not win any special role, reaches the specified number of games (50 games in this embodiment) or reaches the specified number of games without deriving the RT transition outcome described later. Either one of the special roles is won before, or the RT transition outcome to be described later is derived, and the process is terminated by transitioning to RT (2) to be described later.

  Also, when the combination of “watermelon-replay-watermelon” (hereinafter also referred to as “RT transition outcome”) is stopped on any winning line in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3) described later, The special lottery (if none of the special roles have been carried over) and the small role draw probability are the same as the normal game state, but the replay (1) win probability is higher than the normal game state and RT (1) And a replay time (2) (RT (2)) in which the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1) is controlled. Then, RT (2) does not win any special roles, reaches any of the specified number of games (200 games in this embodiment) without winning any of the cherries, or before reaching the specified number of games. It ends with either winning a special role or winning one of the cherries. If any special role is won during RT (2), RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins, and the specified number of games will be reached. The RT (2) will not end until the winning special role wins.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3), which will be described later, the RT transition outcome, that is, replay (2), is won on any winning line, and automatic stop control is performed. When a display mode derived on the condition that the reel stop control is performed is derived, the control is controlled to RT (2) which is advantageous to the player.

  For the transition to RT with the transition to RT (2), it is necessary to wait until the automatic stop time elapses without performing the stop operation and to stop the reel by the automatic stop control. In addition, since the RT transition outcome is derived on the condition that the replay (2) is won, the player performs a stop operation in consideration of whether or not the replay (2) is won. It is possible to select whether to stop the reel or to stop the reel by automatic stop control without performing a stop operation, and the game can be sharpened.

  In addition, as described above, in order to win a small role or a re-gamer, it is necessary for the player to perform a stop operation, and if the automatic stop is always performed, the number of medals that can be obtained is smaller than when the stop operation is always performed. Therefore, it is important to select whether to stop the reel by performing a stop operation or to stop the reel by automatic stop control without performing the stop operation.

  In particular, in this embodiment, after the start of RT (1), the expected number of games until the replay (2) is won in RT (1) (the numerator of the winning probability of replay (2) in RT (1) is 1. If all games are set to automatic stop control over the denominator value, that is, if it is assumed that no winning will occur once during this period, the replay (2) is won in RT (1). RT (1) so that the number of medals required for setting the number of bets for one game × the number of bets for one game) is larger than the number of medals that can be expected to increase when RT (2) is digested to the specified number of games. ) If the winning probability of replay (2) is determined in RT) and the transition outcome notification described later is not made in RT (1), the result of selecting automatic stop control until the RT transition outcome is derived As When the stop control is not selected and the transition to RT (2) is not performed, more medals can be obtained. Therefore, the automatic stop control is always performed in spite of the fact that the transition start notification described later is not performed in RT (1). This prevents the operation of the slot machine from being reduced more than necessary.

  In addition, “Watermelon-Replay-Replay”, which is the transition to RT, is derived on the winning line on condition that Replay (2) is won and all reels are stopped by automatic stop control. Even if Replay (2) is won and the reels are stopped by automatic stop control, if there is a reel that has already been stopped along with the stop operation before shifting to automatic stop control. Since it is not derived on the winning line, it is possible to determine whether or not the replay (2) is won from the display mode of some reels derived by the stop operation by the player, thereby deriving the RT transition outcome It can be prevented that it is determined whether or not. That is, it can be prevented that whether or not the RT transition outcome can be derived despite the fact that the transition outcome winning notification described later is not made.

  In addition, after the BB is completed in accordance with the winning of the BB (1) (2), the RT (1) is controlled to increase the winning probability of the replay (2). As described above, the outcome of the RT transition is derived on the winning line on the condition that the replay (2) is won and the reel stop control is performed by the automatic stop control. By controlling to RT (1) where the winning probability is increased, the possibility of shifting to RT (2) increases, and the player's expectation to shift to RT (2) can be enhanced. Further, since the probability that the RT transition outcome can be derived varies depending on whether the game is in the normal gaming state or RT (1), the game flow can be sharpened.

  In RT (2), the payout rate of medals per game is higher than that of RT (1), the number of predetermined games as the end condition is larger than RT (1), and more medals than RT (1). Therefore, by controlling to RT (1), it is possible to further increase the player's expectation to shift to RT (2).

  Also, RT (1) and RT (2) both have an expected increase rate of medals per game exceeding 1, and an increase in medals can be expected only by being controlled by RT (1). By moving to 2), further increase in medals can be expected.

  In addition, RT (2) will be special if any special role is won after the start of RT (2) and before the specified number of games is reached, if the selected special role does not win. RT (2) will not end with the winning of and if the selected special combination is not awarded, it will be possible to continue control to RT (2) until the specified number of games is reached. Even if a special role is won in 2), if the selected special role is not won, RT (2) can be consumed until the specified number of games is reached, giving the player a sense of loss. There is no end.

  In addition, since the winning flag of the special role is carried over after the next game until the special role is won, after the RT (2) reaches the specified number of games, the special role won during that time is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectation for winning the special role at the end of RT (2).

  If any cherry wins during RT (2), RT (2) will end even if the specified number of games has not been reached since the start of RT (2) unless any special role is won However, it is possible to avoid winning of black cherries, net cherries, white cherries, and special roles by automatically stopping without performing a stop operation as described above. As a result, by setting the automatic stop without performing the stop operation, even if any of the cherries or special roles are elected, these cherries or special roles win and RT (2) ends. It can be avoided.

  In this way, when one of the cherries that will be the end condition is won by winning at RT (2), the reel is stopped by the automatic stop control after waiting for the automatic stop time to elapse without performing the stop operation. By doing so, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2). Therefore, the player stops the reel by performing a stop operation in consideration of whether or not any cherry is won in RT (2), or performs the automatic stop control without performing the stop operation. It is possible to select whether to stop or not, so that the game can be sharpened.

  Further, as described above, in order to win a small role or a re-gamer, it is necessary for the player to perform a stop operation. When RT (2) is always automatically stopped, the end of RT (2) is surely avoided. However, since the number of medals that can be obtained will be reduced compared to the case where the stop operation is always performed, the stop operation is performed to stop the reel or the automatic stop control is performed without performing the stop operation. The importance of selecting whether to stop or not increases.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, when the falling combination type notification described later is not made in RT (2), it is not possible to specify whether any cherry is winning, and appropriate automatic stop control is performed. As a result, even when the automatic stop control is not selected, more medals can be obtained. Therefore, the automatic stop control is selected in spite of the fact that the fall type combination notification described later is not made in RT (2). This prevents the operation of the slot machine from being reduced more than necessary.

  In addition, since there is only one black cherry, net cherry and white cherry black cherry, black cherry, and white cherry symbols on the left reel. If you don't stop the 4-line pull-in range for a winning line that has a combination of cherries, net cherries, and white cherries, you can avoid the combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. Even if the symbols that make up the special combination are stopped on one of the winning lines, the symbols that make up the special combination on the middle reel and the right reel are arranged at four or more intervals. Since there is a stop operation position where the constituent symbols cannot be pulled in, it is possible to avoid the combination of special roles. As a result, even if it is not automatic stop, by performing a stop operation with the operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherry, net cherry, white cherry or special combination, any cherry or special combination Even when winning, it can be avoided that these cherries and special roles win and RT (2) ends.

  As a result, after the start of RT (2), when the falling combination is elected, not only the automatic stop is selected, but also the operation procedure for avoiding the winning combination of the falling combination, that is, the timing outside the pull-in range of the combination of the falling combination. Even if the player performs a stop operation, that is, the RT (2) can be continued even by the technical intervention of the player, the interest associated with the RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the left reel, there is an area where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol is drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if any cherry is selected during RT (2), it is not possible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known. Yes, you will miss the winning cherries with a probability of 2/3, but if the winning cherries win with a probability of 1/3 and no special role has been won, RT (2 ) Will end. As a result, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not RT (2) continues depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with RT (2) can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to avoid the falling combination by the technical intervention of the player. However, when the falling combination is elected, if the stop operation is performed, the falling combination always wins. According to the configuration, that is, depending on the technical intervention of the player, the winning combination of the falling combination cannot be avoided and the winning of the falling combination can be avoided only when the automatic stop is selected.

  In addition, black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are accompanied by payout of three or less medals, which is the number of medals necessary to set the maximum bet number (3) that can be set for one game. Because it is a prize (with a maximum of two payouts), even if avoiding a falling role, the player will not suffer a major disadvantage, and the winning probability of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry The payout rate of the machine 1 is not greatly affected.

  In addition, the black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries that fall are likely to be won at the same time as BB (2). Even if it is established, BB (2) may be won at the same time. Therefore, even if the termination condition for RT (2) is established, BB (2) can be expected to be won.

  Also, if any special role is won in RT (2), even if one of the cherries wins, if one of the cherries wins if the selected special role is not won, Since RT (2) will not end until the specified number of games is reached, during this period, if any cherry wins, the winning cherries will be awarded to win the special role. Since more medals can be earned compared to, the number of medals that can be earned afterwards when compared to when not winning, if any special role is won during RT (2) Can be increased.

  When the replay (2) that allows the RT transition outcome to be derived during RT (1) is won, the sub CPU 91a performs a transition outcome winning notification that notifies that fact.

  The transition-out winning notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize that the replay (2) has been won, and an image indicating that the replay (2) has been won is displayed on the liquid crystal display 51. It may be notified by doing this, or it may be notified by turning on an LED, outputting sound, or the like.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a determines the type of the winning combination (type of the falling combination specified from the internal winning flag) when the falling combination (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is won in RT (2). Informing the falling role type to be notified.

  The falling role type notification indicates that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, the white cherry has been won, the color or pattern that suggests that win (black, black to indicate that the black cherry has been won, When the net cherry indicates that it has been won, it is indicated by shading, and when the white cherry indicates that it has been won, white) is notified, thereby informing the type of the falling role.

  Note that the fallen role type notification is not limited as long as the player can recognize the type of the fallen role, and the type of the fallen role itself, or the combination of symbols, the symbols that differ depending on the type of fallen role, It may be notified by displaying an image or the like suggesting the type on the liquid crystal display 51, or by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a different symbol depending on the type of the falling role (such as a symbol that is located near the constituent symbol of the falling role and stands out from the constituent symbol of the falling role), an image that suggests the index symbol, etc. You may make it alert | report.

  As will be described later, the sub CPU 91a performs a notification lottery for determining whether or not to execute the transition-winning-winning notification and the falling-combination-type notification during RT (1) ( 2) When the information lottery is executed and the notification lottery is won, the notification winning flag is set in the RAM 91c. Then, when the replay (2) is won in RT (1), it is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is set. A notification execution lottery for determining whether or not to perform notification is performed, and a transition-out winning notification is executed on condition that the notification is won. Also, when any cherry is won in RT (2), it is determined whether or not the notification winning flag is set. If the notification winning flag is set, the fall type combination notification is actually made. Is executed in order to determine whether or not to execute, and a falling combination type notification corresponding to the condition that the winning is made is executed. In other words, when a black cherry is won, a falling role type notification that notifies black that indicates the winning of black cherry is executed, and when a net cherry is won, a falling role that notifies of the shading that indicates the winning of net cherry is notified. The type notification is executed, and when the white cherry is won, the falling role type notification for notifying the white indicating the winning of the white cherry is executed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, even if the replay (2) is won, if the stop operation is performed to stop the reel, it is not possible to derive the RT transition outcome that triggers the transition to RT (2). On the other hand, if automatic stop is always selected, none of the winning combinations can be won, and medals are reduced as compared with the case where the stop operation is performed. ) Will not cover the decrease in medals and will be meaningless.

  On the other hand, when the replay (2) is won in RT (1) and the transition-out winning notification is executed, the fact that the replay (2) is won in the game, that is, the automatic stop is selected. It becomes possible to recognize that it is possible to derive the RT transition outcome, and it is possible to select the automatic stop only for the necessary game in RT (1) and derive the RT transition outcome to shift to RT (2). It becomes possible.

  Note that the transition-winning notification is executed on the condition that the notification winning flag is set and the notification execution lottery is won, but when the notification winning flag is set, It may be executed without fail.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, if any cherry wins in a state where no special combination is won in RT (2), it is before the specified number of games is reached from the start of RT (2). RT (2) will end, but as described above, the black reel, net cherry, and white cherry that make up the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry symbols. Since it cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, if any cherry is selected in the state where no special role is won in RT (2), the cherry is intentionally unclear. It is impossible to remove the cherries, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3, and RT (2) will end. It becomes Rukoto.

  Although you can avoid winning a cherry by selecting automatic stop, you cannot specify when a cherry is won. If you always select automatic stop, you can win any combination. Since medals are reduced, the meaning is lost even if RT (2) continues.

  On the other hand, when no special combination is won in RT (2), when any cherries wins, if the falling combination type notification is executed, the player has won the falling combination. In addition, the color or pattern suggested by the notified color or pattern makes it possible to recognize which combination of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry has been won. Thus, it is possible to specify a stop operation position where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel constituting the white cherry are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, in the state where no special combination is won in RT (2), if any cherry is won, the fallen combination type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the color or The pattern makes it possible to recognize the type of cherry that has been won, and as a result, it is possible to know the operating procedure for avoiding winning of a cherry that may have been won, and the player deliberately picks the winning cherry. By spilling, it is possible to avoid the end of RT (2) accompanying the winning of the cherry and continue RT (2).

  In addition, the player does not always have to practice an operation procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination in RT (2), and an operating procedure for avoiding a winning combination of a falling combination is performed only when the falling combination type notification is executed. Since it only has to be performed, the burden on the player in RT (2) can be reduced.

  Further, the falling combination type notification is executed on the condition that the notification winning flag is set and the notification execution lottery is won. The number of games in which RT (2) continues can be changed according to the winning probability of the notification execution lottery instead of the notification being executed. The configuration may be such that notification is executed, and the number of games in which RT (2) continues may be varied depending on the number of notifications.

  In addition, as described above, there is no stop operation position that can be aimed at the same cherry and “7” symbol at the same time on the left reel, so the player aims at the “7” symbol of the color or pattern suggested by the falling role type notification. By performing the stop operation of the left reel, the winning color or pattern cherry is not won, and the end of RT (2) can be avoided. That is, in the falling role type notification, in addition to notifying the type of the falling role won by the suggested color or pattern, the position serving as an index for avoiding the winning of the falling role is also notified. ing.

  In addition, when a fallen combination type notification is executed, the stop operation is not performed, and automatic stop is selected, so that the winning of the falling combination can be avoided without performing the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the falling combination. Can do. That is, the player can avoid the winning of the falling role by technical intervention according to his / her skill level, and can also avoid the winning of the falling role by selecting automatic stop.

  In this embodiment, when the sub CPU 91a wins the notification lottery in BB, the sub CPU 91a executes the notification mode lottery for selecting any notification mode from a plurality of notification modes having different winning probabilities of the notification execution lottery, and the winning notification The mode is set in the RAM 91c. Then, in the notification execution lottery executed when the replay (2) is won in the subsequent RT (1) or when the falling combination is won in the RT (2), the notification mode set in the RAM 91c is referred to. It is determined whether or not to execute the transition-out winning notification or the falling combination type notification with the winning probability corresponding to the set notification mode.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the notification mode includes a notification mode A in which a falling combination type notification is executed with a probability of 30% when a falling combination is won, a notification mode B in which a ratio of 50% is executed, and 70%. The notification mode C is executed at a rate, and the notification mode D is executed at a rate of 90%, and the probability increases in the order of the notification modes A, B, C, D. D has a higher probability of continuing RT to the specified number of games. That is, the advantage for the player increases in the order of A, B, C, and D.

  As shown to Fig.17 (a), whether the ratio with which alerting | reporting mode AD is selected in alerting | reporting mode lottery is BB which the said alerting mode lottery was executed by BB (1) winning, In the notification mode lottery executed in the former, the notification modes A and B in which the notification probability is less than 70%, that is, the notification probability is relatively low. The mode is selected at a higher rate than the notification mode lottery executed in the latter, and in the notification mode lottery executed in the former, the notification modes C and D in which the notification probability is 70% or more, that is, the notification probability is relatively The high notification mode is selected at a higher rate than the notification mode lottery executed in the former. For this reason, the notification mode in which the notification lottery with the BB transferred by winning the BB (2) wins the notification lottery is higher than the case where the notification lottery is won with the BB transferred by winning the BB (1) Is easy to select.

  The sub CPU 91a executes, as the BB effect, the BB effect of the effect mode selected by the player when winning the BB (1) (2) among the effect modes of the BB effect modes A to C. Specifically, the BB effect modes A to C are displayed in a selectable manner on the liquid crystal display 51 at the time of winning BB (1) and (2), and the region where the desired BB effect mode is displayed is selected by touching. The BB effect mode is set.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17B, the sub CPU 91a executes the notification lottery with different triggers according to the BB effect mode, and the winning probability at that time also applies different probabilities according to the BB effect mode. Furthermore, the notification that the information lottery is won is also made at different timings according to the BB effect mode.

  Specifically, when the BB effect mode A is selected, a notification lottery is executed when a bell wins during BB, and the winning probability at that time is about 7.7%. In addition, if the winning combination type notice lottery is won, after the winning game, the fact that the winning combination type notice lottery has been won will be announced with a probability of 1/2 of the Bell winning prize, and no notice will be given by the end of the BB. At the end of the BB, the fact that the notice lottery has been won is announced.

  When the BB effect mode B is selected, when the bell is not won during the BB, that is, when a role other than the bell is won or when the player loses, the notification lottery is executed. Is 100%. In addition, if the information lottery is won, the fact that the information lottery has been won is notified immediately.

  When the BB effect mode C is selected, when the bell is won during the BB, the first stop reel is randomly determined from the left, middle, and right with an equal probability, and the player first A notification lottery is executed when the stopped reels coincide with the first stop reel determined in advance, and the winning probability at that time is about 23.2%. In addition, when the notice lottery is won, at the end of the BB, the fact that the notice lottery has been won is notified.

  Regardless of the BB effect modes A to C, the actual probability of winning the notification lottery in each game in the BB (BB effect mode A: Bell winning probability (winning probability) x winning probability of the falling role type notification lottery) , BB production mode B: winning probability of a role other than Bell + losing probability, BB production mode C: Bell winning probability / 3) are almost the same probability (about 7.2%).

  In this way, the notification lottery for determining whether or not the transition-out winning notification and the falling role type notification are performed is performed during the BB, and the result is notified by the BB effect specific to the BB. It is possible to enhance the inside interest.

  In addition, the notice lottery is executed at the opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode selected by the player, and the probability corresponding to the BB effect mode is applied as the winning probability at that time, and the BB selected by the player is selected. Since the timing for determining whether or not to perform the notification lottery according to the effect mode and the expectation at that timing change, it is possible to increase the consciousness that the player is actively participating in the game. Further, since the notification that the notification lottery is won is also made at the opportunity corresponding to the BB effect mode, the timing of the notification lottery and the notification timing can be properly associated.

  In addition, when winning the notification lottery, the probability that the transition-out winning notification will be executed when the replay (2) is won in the subsequent RT (1), the fall when the falling role is won in RT (2) A notification mode lottery for selecting one of the notification modes from a plurality of notification modes with different probabilities of executing the role type notification is executed, and the system subsequently shifts depending on the notification mode selected in the notification mode lottery. The probability that the transition outcome winning notification will be executed at RT (1), and the probability that the fallen role type notification will be executed when the falling role is won at RT (2) change. As a result, RT (1) to RT Since the probability of transition to (2) and the number of games that can be expected to continue RT (2) also change, the interest associated with RT (1) (2) can be further enhanced.

  In addition, BB includes BB (1) and BB (2). BB (2) has a larger number of medals that can be expected during BB than BB (1), and BB (2) The higher the rate at which the notification mode having a higher notification probability than BB (1) is selected, the BB (2) can be expected to acquire more medals than the BB (1). That is, not only the number of medals that can be expected during BB, but also the number of continued games in RT (2), that is, the number of medals that can be expected during RT (2), varies depending on the type of special role. Depending on the type of special role, the increase or decrease of medals can be sharpened.

  In the present embodiment, RT (2) will not end even if any cherry wins in the state where any special role is won in RT (2), so either one in RT (2) After winning the special role, you can win more medals by winning black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries. However, as mentioned above, Since the “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry” and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, these black cherries, It is impossible to intentionally win net cherries or white cherries. If you win these roles, you can win with a probability of 1/3, but with a probability of 2/3. Resulting in spilled.

  On the other hand, the sub CPU 91a notifies that the special combination is won at a rate of 1/2 when any special combination is won during RT (2), and any special combination is carried over. When any cherry wins in the state and the winning of the special role is notified, the falling role type notification is executed regardless of whether the notification winning flag is set or not. . For this reason, when any special combination is elected in RT (2) and the special combination is notified, either black cherry, net cherry or white cherry is selected In addition, it is possible to recognize the winning combination, and it is possible to win all the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. In addition, even if the special role is won, in the state where the fact is not notified, it is controlled in the same manner as the state where the special role is not won, that is, the notification winning flag is set, When the winning combination is won, if the notification execution lottery is won, the falling combination type notification is executed, and if the notification winning flag is not set, the falling combination type notification is not executed, so in RT (2) Even when the winning combination is not notified, the player can always have a sense of expectation for the special winning combination.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 41a, in the normal gaming state, "black 7 / net 7 / white 7 / watermelon-black 7 / net" excluding "black 7-black 7-black 7" and "black 7-black 7-white 7". When the combination of “7 / White 7 / Watermelon-Black 7 / White 7 / Watermelon” is aligned with any winning line, that is, when the watermelon is winning or when the chance is aligned with any winning line, The lottery probability of special role, small role, and replay (2) is the same as in the normal gaming state, but the winning probability of replay (1) is higher than the normal gaming state, and the payout rate of medals per game is The replay time is set to 1 or less (3) (RT (3)). Then, RT (3) will not win any special role and will not win replay (2) and will reach the specified number of games (5 games in this embodiment) or before reaching the specified number of games. Either special role is won and the process proceeds to RT (4), which will be described later, or replay (2) wins and the process proceeds to RT (2).

  Also, when any special role is won in the normal gaming state, RT (1), RT (3) (including the case where a special role is won at the same time as a small role), or any special role in RT (2) After winning the game, when the RT (2) is completed by reaching the specified number of games, the draw probability of the small role and the replay (2) is the same as the normal game state, but the replay (1) is won. The replay time (4) (RT (4)) is controlled so that the probability is higher than the normal gaming state and the medal payout rate per game is 1 or less. RT (4) ends when the winning special combination wins and moves to BB. Note that RT (2) has no specified number of games, and once it has shifted, it continues until the special combination wins.

  In this way, when any special combination is won (including the case where one special combination is won at the same time), the transition to RT (4) where the winning probability of the re-playing combination is higher than in the normal gaming state. In addition, when a re-gamer and a special role are won at the same time, control is performed so that the combination of symbols constituting the re-gamer is preferentially drawn into the winning line over the combination of symbols constituting the special role. Even if a special role is elected, it is difficult to find a combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won. It is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when any of the watermelons that are likely to have won special roles in the normal gaming state wins, or when the chances are aligned with any of the winning lines, a maximum of 5 games The transition to RT (3) where the winning probability of the re-gamer is higher than in the normal gaming state over time, and RT (3) triggered by the fact that watermelon wins or chances are aligned on any winning line. ) Or RT (4), even if a special role has been won, it is difficult to determine the combination of symbols that make up the special role, making it difficult to determine whether the special role has been won. In addition, it is possible to effectively maintain the player's expectation for the possibility of winning the special role suggested by having a chance line on any winning line.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 91a executes a continuous effect over five games when a watermelon wins in the normal gaming state or RT (1), or when chances are aligned on any winning line. A continuous production is performed that leads to a production result indicating whether or not one of the special roles is won.

  There are two types of continuous effects, continuous effects A and B, and the sub CPU 91a continues when the watermelon is won in the normal gaming state or RT (1), or when the chances are aligned with one of the winning lines. An effect selection lottery is performed, and either of continuous effects A and B is selected. At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects one of the continuous effects A and B at a different rate according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18A, in the continuous effect A, the setting values are in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, the setting values are higher (setting values advantageous to the player). It is selected at a high rate, and the continuous performance B is selected at a higher rate as the setting values are in the order of 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, that is, the setting values are lower (setting values that are disadvantageous for the player). It has become. Further, in the situation where the game history as a result of the past game is disadvantageous for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous for the player. The game history is, for example, the number of games from the previous BB, the payout rate of medals in a certain period, the number of special winnings, etc. The disadvantageous situation for the player is, for example, from the previous BB The number of games exceeds the reference number of games, the medal payout rate for a certain period is less than the reference payout rate, the special role winning count is less than the reference number, and the like.

  The sub CPU 91a executes a result notification effect for a certain time after the continuous effect selection lottery, and performs a result notification indicating whether the continuous effect A is finally selected or the continuous effect B is selected. In addition, when the continuous effect B is selected by the continuous effect selection lottery, the continuous effect B is executed after the result notification. On the other hand, when the continuous effect A is selected, after the result notification, the next The sub game is executed during the period until the bet number of the game is set, and either one of the continuous effects A or B is executed according to the result. In addition, after a continuous production selection lottery, when a certain time has elapsed, that is, before the result notification, the bet number setting operation or the credit or bet number adjustment operation is performed and the result notification effect is canceled halfway Regardless of which of the continuous effects A and B is selected, the result notification indicating that the continuous effect B is selected is performed, and then the continuous effect B is executed.

  The sub game includes a pseudo reel game and a touch game, and the player can select one of them.

  The pseudo reel game is a game in which the pseudo reel displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 is pushed. The sub CPU 91a first displays the three pseudo reels in a stopped state on the screen of the liquid crystal display 51 in the pseudo reel game. In this state, when the operation of the start switch 7 is determined based on the operation detection command, the pseudo reel is changed. After the change, the operation of the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R is determined based on the operation detection command, thereby corresponding pseudo reel. And the display result is derived. When the display results are derived for all the pseudo reels, it is determined whether or not a specific symbol combination (for example, chance-chance-chance) has been prepared. Executes the continuous effect A, and executes the continuous effect B when the combination of specific symbols is not complete.

  Further, after the pseudo reel game is started, the sub CPU 91a does not operate the start switch 7 or operates the start switch 7, but does not operate the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, and does not operate the pseudo reel game. Even if the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed in the middle of the game and the pseudo reel game is stopped, the continuous effect B is performed as in the case where a specific symbol combination is not prepared in the pseudo reel game. Execute.

  The touch game is a game in which a player obtains a score by operating the touch panel according to the content displayed on the liquid crystal display 51, and the sub CPU 91a receives the score obtained in the sub game at the end of the sub game. It is determined whether or not the value is equal to or greater than the specified value. If the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, the continuous effect A is executed, and if it is less than the specified value, the continuous effect B is executed.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a cancels the touch game when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game or when the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed before the touch game is finished. Even if the touch game score is less than the specified value, the continuous effect B is executed.

  In the continuous performance B, one of the characters a to e is the main character. When the sub CPU 91a executes the continuous performance A, the sub CPU 91a performs a character selection lottery and selects any one of the characters a to e as the main character. At this time, the sub CPU 91a selects any of the characters a to e at different ratios according to the set value. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18B, the character a has a higher set value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, that is, a higher set value (a set value advantageous to the player). The character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than the odd number, and the character c is selected at a higher rate than when the set value is odd, d is selected only when the setting value is 6, that is, the highest setting (the most advantageous setting for the player), and the character e is set in the order of the setting values 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6; The lower the value (a setting value that is disadvantageous for the player), the higher the ratio is selected.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the ratio in which the character a and the character e are main characters in the continuous performance A differs according to the set value, and the setting that is advantageous for the player if the ratio of the character a is high and the ratio of the character e is low. If the ratio of the character e is high and the ratio of the character a is low, there is a high possibility that the setting value is disadvantageous for the player. For this reason, it becomes possible to estimate a set value from the frequency with which the character a and the character b become the main characters in the continuous performance A.

  In the conventional slot machine, an effect that suggests a set value is performed at the time of winning a BB. Generally, the lower the set value, the lower the appearance rate of the BB. Thus, the set value is triggered by the BB win. If the BB is not awarded for a while, the player decides that the set value is low before suggesting the set value and stops the game. In spite of having a function that suggests a set value, it is difficult to sufficiently maintain the player's willingness to continue the game in order to guess the set value.

  On the other hand, in this example, it is suggested that when a watermelon wins, or when chances are aligned to any of the winning lines, that is, there is a possibility that a special role is won in the normal gaming state. Regardless of whether the special role is won or not, a continuous performance A that suggests the set value is executed, so it is possible to guess the set value without waiting for the special role winning or special role winning In addition, the character a and the character e are not always selected in the continuous effect A, and even if the character a and the character e are selected, the continuous effect A is only executed once or twice. The set value cannot be determined, and in order to be sure of the estimated set value, it is necessary to consider the character selection rate in a considerable number of continuous effects B. Special Even if the role has continued for the state not to win, in order to guess the set value, it is possible to effectively sustain the willingness of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested is based on the condition that the continuous effect A is selected in the continuous effect selection lottery when the watermelon wins or when the chances are aligned with any winning line. Since the continuous effect A is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, the execution frequency of the continuous effect A is relatively lower when the set value is lower than when the set value is high. Therefore, when the set value is low, it is necessary to stack more games until the set value is confident, and a high operating rate can be realized even when the set value is low.

  In addition, since the continuous performance A is selected at a different rate according to the game history, the setting value is suggested at a more preferable frequency according to the situation from the game history, that is, the player's past game result. Continuous production A can be executed. In particular, in this embodiment, in a situation where the game history is unfavorable for the player, the continuous performance A is selected at a higher rate than the situation where the game history is advantageous to the player. The situation that is disadvantageous to the player makes it easier to guess the set value. Even in such a situation, the player's willingness to continue the game can be effectively maintained in order to guess the set value. it can.

  Further, among the characters a to e, the characters a to c and e may be selected in all settings, but the character d is selected only when the set value is 6, that is, the highest set value. Since there is a possibility that the character d is the main character, the continuous effect A is executed, and the maximum setting value is determined. By having the character d that is determined to be the highest set value, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained more effectively.

  Character b is selected at a higher rate when the set value is odd than at an even number, and character c is selected at a higher rate when the set value is even than at an odd number. From the appearance frequency of the continuous production B in which the character b is the main character and the continuous production B in which the character c is the main character, it can be estimated to some extent whether the setting value is an odd setting or an even setting. The accuracy of the estimation can be increased, but if the continuous production B is not executed a considerable number of times, it cannot be determined whether the setting is an odd setting or an even setting. The player's willingness to continue can be maintained more effectively. Furthermore, the combination of the appearance frequency of the characters b and c and the appearance frequency of the characters a and e is complicated, and it becomes difficult to be sure because the suspicion occurs in the estimated allowable stage, thereby increasing the difficulty of setting estimation. Can do.

  In the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of the characters b and c among the plurality of characters. For example, a specific character varies depending on the set value during the continuous performance. It may be configured to appear at a ratio, and a setting value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of a specific character.

  Also, in this embodiment, an effect in which the set value is suggested is triggered when the watermelon wins or when the chance line is aligned with any of the winning lines. It is only necessary that an effect that suggests a set value is executed without waiting for winning or winning a special role. For example, when a specific role other than the special role is won or won, or when the power is turned on. , After the end of the BB, etc., that the specified number of games has passed from a certain starting point, that the number of times that a specific role has been won or won from a certain starting point has reached the specified number of times, the medal payout rate, the number of increased medals An effect that suggests a set value may be executed when the number of medals decreases or the like reaches a specified value. Even in such a case, a special role is not won, Or Betsuyaku even if the continued state not win, in order to infer the set value, it is possible to effectively maintain the motivation of the player to try to continue the game.

  In addition, after the power is turned on, the end of the BB, etc., the specified number of games has elapsed from a certain starting point, the number of times that a specific role has been won or won from a certain starting point has reached the specified number of times, the medal payout rate When an effect in which a set value is suggested is triggered when the number of medals increases or the number of medals decreases reaches a specified value, the set value is suggested using a driving tool or the like. Unauthorized sales such as providing slot machines set in a state in which productions are likely to appear to players, for example, at the start of business at a game store, etc., may be carried out, which may impair the fairness of the game. Such fraud can be prevented by taking measures to prevent the use of the driving tool, such as restricting the release of the connection of the connector by the connector restricting member.

  Further, in this embodiment, the continuous production A, that is, the production in which the set value is suggested, is selected at a higher rate as the set value is higher, but at least more advantageous than the set value having the highest advantage. The setting value with the lowest setting value only needs to produce an effect in which the setting value is suggested at a lower ratio. For example, the setting value is 3 or less than the setting value is 4 or less. The setting value is suggested at a lower rate when the setting value is an even setting value including the highest setting value than when the setting value is an odd setting value including the lowest setting value. You may make it perform the produced effect.

  Further, in this embodiment, after the continuous effect selection lottery, the result notification effect is executed for a predetermined time, and the result notification indicating whether the continuous effect A is finally selected or the continuous effect B is selected is performed. If the bet number setting operation or the credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed before a certain time elapses, that is, before the result notification, the result notification effect is canceled halfway, for example, the continuous effect A is selected. Even if it is a case, the result notification which shows that the continuous production B was selected is performed, and the continuous production B is performed after that. As a result, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is suggested on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or credit or betting amount adjustment operation being performed. Since the continuous effect A is executed, the player does not cancel the effect until the result notification effect ends in order to estimate the set value. Thereby, it becomes possible to increase the willingness of the player to execute the result notification effect to the end without canceling the result notification effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced to the extent originally intended by the result notification effect. On the other hand, if the betting number setting operation or credit or betting amount adjustment operation is performed, the result notification effect can be canceled, and the player can select whether to execute the result notification effect until the end. For a player who wants to advance the game ahead of making the setting guess, the game can be advanced.

  In this embodiment, after the start of the result notification effect, the set value is set on the condition that the result notification effect has ended after a certain period of time has elapsed without the betting number setting operation or the credit or betting number adjustment operation being performed. However, when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle, there is an effect in which the set value is suggested at a higher rate than if it was canceled in the middle. The same effects as described above can be obtained as a configuration to be executed.

  In addition, the effect executed when the result notification effect ends without being canceled in the middle is not limited to the effect in which the set value is suggested, but information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game ( For example, any effect may be used as long as the above-mentioned falling role type notification is notified.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the continuous effect A is selected in the continuous effect selection lottery, one sub game of the pseudo reel game or the touch game is executed. In the pseudo reel game, when a specific symbol combination can be arranged on the pseudo reel through the operation of the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R, or in the touch game, the specified value is obtained through the operation of the touch panel. In contrast to the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested when the above-mentioned specification is acquired, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated after the pseudo reel game is started. However, when the stop switch 8L, 8C, or 8R is not operated and the bet number setting operation or credit or bet settlement operation is performed during the pseudo reel game, When the touch game ends without any touch panel operation in the game or before the touch game ends When the touch game is stopped due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation, the continuous effect B is executed instead of the continuous effect A in which the set value is suggested. . That is, in order to infer the set value, it is necessary to actively operate the start switch 7, stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R and the touch panel that are not directly related to the game. Can increase the willingness to perform technical interventions that are not directly related to each other, so that it is possible to effectively utilize the functions that can be produced using these operation means.

  In this embodiment, after the pseudo reel game is started, the start switch 7 is not operated or the start switch 7 is operated, but the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R are not operated, and the pseudo reel game is not operated. In the middle of the game, when the bet number setting operation or credit or bet amount adjustment operation is performed, the pseudo reel game is stopped, or when the touch game is finished without any touch panel operation in the touch game, or the touch game If the touch game is canceled due to a betting number setting operation or a credit or betting amount adjustment operation before the end of the game, the continuous effect suggested by the setting value is not executed. When technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and stop switches 8L, 8C, 8R, or touch When the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the system, an effect that suggests the set value is performed at a higher rate than when the technical intervention is not performed. Similar effects can be obtained.

  In addition, when the technical intervention is performed by operating the start switch 7 and the stop switches 8L, 8C, and 8R in the pseudo reel game, or when the technical intervention is performed through the operation of the touch panel in the touch game, The production is not limited to the production in which the set value is suggested, and any production in which information that is advantageous to the player when the player progresses the game (for example, the above-described drop role type notification) may be used.

  Also, in this embodiment, it is confirmed that the continuous performance A suggesting the set value has won a watermelon suggested that a special role may have been won, or that chance chances are aligned on any winning line. Since it is executed as a trigger, the set value is suggested by the continuous performance A, and the possibility of winning the special role is also suggested, so that the expectation for the special role can be increased. Furthermore, since the continuous performance is executed in duplicate with the RT in which it is difficult to determine whether or not the special role is won, the result of the continuous performance, that is, whether or not the special role is won. It can be noticed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of combinations are determined in advance as the production patterns of each game constituting the continuous production regardless of the type of the continuous production. When the sub CPU 91a starts the continuous production, the sub CPU 91a selects the combination of the production patterns at a ratio according to whether or not the special combination is won. For example, if the ratio of the first combination selected from the first combination and the second combination is higher when the special combination is won than when the special combination is not selected, the first combination When the continuous effect is executed, the expectation for winning the special role can be enhanced as compared with the case where the continuous effect is executed with the second combination.

  On the other hand, even after the start of continuous production, even before the end, watermelons that may have been elected special roles may win or chances may be on any of the winning lines. In some cases, the possibility of winning a special role will increase, but if the combination of production patterns is determined in advance as described above, the watermelon will win or the chance line will be one of the winning lines Even if they are all together, there is no change in the flow of the continuous production, and the expectation of the special role by the continuous production does not change.

  For this reason, in this embodiment, after the start of continuous production, when a watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end, or the chances are aligned on any winning line Sometimes, the combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles rather than the combination of production patterns of continuous production currently being executed, that is, the ratio that is selected when a special role is won is higher than the current combination It changes to the combination of a high production pattern, and the remaining continuous production is performed based on the combination after a change. As a result, after a continuous production based on a combination of production patterns that indicate the possibility of winning a special role, especially a combination of production patterns that cannot be expected for special roles, a watermelon is awarded before the end. If there is a chance that all winning lines are aligned and the possibility of winning a special role is suggested, and the possibility increases, the content of the direct production will also be more than the current one Since it changes to the content which can be expected to win the special role, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role according to the event that occurred during the continuous performance.

  In this embodiment, after the start of continuous production, when a watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end of the performance, or when chances are aligned on any of the winning lines In addition, instead of the combination of production patterns of continuous production currently being executed, it is changed to a combination of production patterns that can be expected to win special roles, and the remaining continuous production is executed based on the changed combination. However, after the start of the continuous performance, when the watermelon that may have won the special role has been won before the end of the performance, or when the chance line is on any of the winning lines, the remaining For at least one game effect pattern (for example, the remaining one game effect pattern, etc.) among the continuous effects, the special role is won more than the combination of the effect patterns initially executed. It may be possible to change to a production pattern that corresponds to the combination of production patterns that can be waited for, and even in this case, after the continuous production that indicates the possibility of winning the special role starts, before it ends In addition, if there is a chance that the watermelon will win or if there is a chance line with any of the winning lines, there is a possibility that it will be elected as a special role, and if that possibility increases, there will also be a content of continuous production Since the content changes to a content that can be expected to win the special role, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectation for the special role according to the event that occurred during the continuous performance.

  Next, a bonus effect executed when BB (3) or BB (4) wins will be described.

  When the BB (3) or BB (4) wins, the sub CPU 91a does not perform the winning notification effect as when the other combination wins, and even if the BB (3) or BB (4) shifts to BB, Continue.

  Furthermore, the combination of BB (3) and BB (4) is composed of “bell” and “replay”, which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. In addition, it is composed of two or more types of symbols, making it difficult to understand that they are aligned with the winning line.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 19, when BB (3) or BB (4) wins and the gaming state shifts to BB, a winning notice lottery is performed during the notice period of up to three games, and the winning notice lottery is won. , A bonus notification effect for notifying the transition to BB is performed. If the winning lottery is not won during the notice period, the bonus notice effect is forcibly performed at the end of the three games.

  Further, the sub CPU 91a executes the first small role announcement effect at a higher rate than the second small role notification effect when the small role is elected alone outside the notification period, whereas the sub CPU 91a is small in the notification period. When the winning combination is won, the second small role notification effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect. In the notification period, the second small role notification effect is executed less frequently than the notification period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a high frequency.

  After the bonus announcement effect, the first bonus effect is executed until the total payout number in BB exceeds 100, which is the end condition of BB transferred by winning BB (4), and the total payout number in BB is The first bonus effect ends with a game that exceeds 100 cards. And if it is BB which shifted by winning of BB (4), bonus production will also be finished with the end of BB (4) as it is, but if it is BB which shifted by winning of BB (3), the following Continuous notification is given at any timing until the game ends (the timing of setting bet number, start operation, or stop operation is determined by lottery), and the total payout number in BB is BB (3 ) The second bonus effect is executed until the number of BBs that have been transferred due to the winning of the game exceeds 300, and the second bonus effect is ended in a game in which the total number of payouts in the BB exceeds 300, The bonus effect ends with the end of BB, which has shifted to the winning of BB (3).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when BB (3) or BB (4) wins, the BB (1) and BB (2) do not produce an effect indicating the BB winning, Until the end of the notification period, after the transition to the BB, it is announced that the transition to the BB has been made by the bonus notification effect. Even if BB (3) or BB (4) has won a prize and has already moved to BB, it can be recognized that the BB has suddenly started without being related to the prize, and the player is surprised. Since it can give sex, the interest associated with the transition to BB can be effectively enhanced.

  The combination of BB (3) and BB (4) is composed of “bell” and “replay”, which are smaller in size than conspicuous symbols such as “7” and more in number on each reel. And it is composed of two or more kinds of symbols and it becomes difficult to understand that the winning line is aligned, so it becomes difficult to determine that BB (3) or BB (4) has won, You can make an impression that BB has started.

  In addition, the transition to RB at the same time as the transition to BB greatly increases the probability of winning a bell, so when transitioning to BB, a bonus notification effect is produced after a sign state (notification period) in which the bell frequently wins. Since it can be recognized as executed, the player's expectation can be enhanced even when the bell wins by himself / herself as the bell frequently wins.

  In addition, when a small role is elected alone outside the announcement period, the first small role announcement production is executed at a higher rate than the second small role announcement production, whereas the small role is elected during the announcement period. The second small role announcement effect is executed at a higher rate than the first small role notification effect, and the second frequency that is executed less than the notification period is low in the notification period. The small role notification effect is executed at a high frequency, and the player's expectation during the notification period can be effectively increased by accompanying the second small role notification effect.

  In addition, the BB transferred by winning the BB (3) and the BB transferred by winning the BB (4) have different payout numbers, that is, the amount of medals that can be acquired during the BB, as described above. Even if the combination of BB (3) and BB (4) is aligned on the winning line, it is difficult for the player to understand. In the first bonus performance period after the bonus announcement, even in the BB that has shifted to the winning of BB (3) Since the same first bonus effect is also executed in the BB transferred by winning the BB (4), it is difficult to determine whether or not the BB continues thereafter when the first bonus effect ends. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the expectation for the BB to continue in the next game.

  Also, if BB continues, there is a possibility that continuation notification may be made at multiple timings during the period until the next game ends, and it is not known when it will be notified, so it gives a moderate tension This makes it possible to effectively enhance the interest and maintain the expectation that the game will continue until the game ends.

  As described above, the first embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. However, the present invention is not limited to the first embodiment, and the present invention can be modified or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. Needless to say, it is included.

  For example, in the first embodiment, as a reel stop control method, stop control using a stop control table created from table creation data registered in advance in the ROM 41b (hereinafter also referred to as a table method) is applied. In addition, it is possible to search for a retractable position at each stop operation timing, and apply stop control (hereinafter also referred to as a control method) based on the search result, or stop control by both the table method and the control method (hereinafter referred to as table + (Also called a control method) may be applied.

  Moreover, you may use these several systems together. For example, as a result of the internal lottery, by using both the table-type stop control and the control-type stop control according to the reel stop time (first stop, second stop, or third stop), As a result of all the internal lotteries, it is not necessary to prepare a stop control table in advance for all the stop times of the reels, so that the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, when a winning combination is missed, the stop control is performed by the table method using the stop control table for a relatively larger number of stopping times than when the winning combination is won. It is possible to diversify display results when a winning combination is won and the winning combination is missed.

  In particular, among the roles in which a special combination is missed, the display results when the special combination is missed can be diversified by performing stop control by the table method using the stop control table when the special combination is elected. In addition, even in the case of a loss that has not been won by any of the roles, it is possible to diversify the display results in the case of a loss by performing stop control using the table method using the stop control table. The degree of freedom in designing the display results that can appear both when winning a role and when not winning is expanded. That is, since the stop position in the case of losing can be limited by the stop control table, it is easy to adjust the stop position and the appearance ratio that are likely to be selected as a special role.

  On the other hand, when a role that does not miss is elected, the relationship with the display result when the special role is missed is weak. In other words, since a special role cannot be expected when a role that does not miss out appears, there is little need to diversify display results when a role that does not miss out is won. For this reason, when a winning combination that does not miss is won, stop control is effectively performed by performing stop control by a control method that does not use the stop control table for a relatively large number of stopping times than when winning a winning combination. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity of the table. That is, the display results can be varied according to the nature of the result of the internal lottery, and the storage capacity of the stop control table can be reduced.

  In addition, since the stop control is always performed in the table system for the first stop, the number of sliding symbols that will not stop from the stop control table selected when the special role is won is determined from the stop control table selected when the special role is not won. Control for deriving a reach (so-called 1st) that is established when a display result is derived for the first stop reel by selecting the registered stop control table and performing the first stop control. It becomes possible to design easily.

  In the first embodiment, even at RT (1), the medal payout rate per game exceeds 1. However, at RT (1), the expected increase rate of medals per game is 1 or less, Alternatively, the value of RT (2) can be relatively increased by doing in this way, so that the player to transition to RT (2) is controlled by RT (1). Can be further enhanced.

  Also, when any special role is elected after RT (1) starts, the RT transition outcome is derived, and when transitioning to RT (2), none of the special roles are elected and RT transition starts. RT (1) is terminated when the specified number of games is reached without deriving eyes, but when any special role is won, the RT transition outcome is derived and RT (2) When a falling combination wins, no special combination wins, no RT transition outcome is derived, and no falling combination wins the specified game number RT (1 ) May be terminated, or when RT (1) is not provided with a specified number of games and RT (1) is started and any special role is won, the RT transition outcome is derived, Exit RT (1) when transitioning to RT (2) or when a falling role wins It may be allowed to.

  Moreover, although it shifts to RT (1) after completion | finish of BB accompanying the winning of BB (1) (2), you may make it transfer to RT (1) after completion | finish of either BB. It is also possible to make a transition to RT (1) after completion of one or both of BB accompanying the winning of BB (3), BB (4), or other occasions. You may make it transfer to RT (1) when the combination of RT transfer output of RT (1) different from RT transfer output is prepared.

  In the first embodiment, after RT (2) starts, if any special role is won before reaching the specified number of games, RT (2) is not terminated and any special role is RT (2) is ended when winning a prize, when one of the cherries, that is, when a falling role is won, or when the specified number of games is reached without winning a special role or a falling role, RT (2) may not be provided with the prescribed number of games, and after RT (2) starts, RT (2) may be terminated when any special combination wins or when a falling combination wins. . In addition, after RT (2) is started without any falling combination, RT (2) is ended when any special combination wins or when the specified number of games is reached without winning any special combination You may make it let it.

  In addition, in the state where any special role is elected, RT (2) will not end even if a fallen role wins during RT (2), but any special role will be elected. Regardless of whether or not the player falls down during RT (2), RT (2) may be terminated.

  In addition, a winning procedure for any type of falling combination is always assigned to all operating procedures that can be operated by the player, and an operating procedure for avoiding winning of any type of falling combination is included. However, by including a winning procedure for at least one other type of falling role, there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of falling roles. A configuration in which part or all of them are common may be used.

  Furthermore, an operation procedure that avoids winnings may be provided for all the falling combinations for all the operation procedures that can be operated by the player. In such a case, it is ensured by the technical intervention of the player. RT (2) can be continued up to the prescribed number of games. In this case, it is preferable to provide an operation procedure that can avoid both the special combination and the fallen combination. By doing so, both the special combination and the fallen combination can be avoided by a common operation procedure.

  Further, at the time when the falling combination wins at RT (2), the game shifts from the next game to the normal gaming state. For example, the number of games shorter than the prescribed number of games of RT (2) (for example, one game) If a special RT transition combination that ends in step) is applied and the falling combination wins, the special RT transition may be made to transition to the normal gaming state.

  In addition, the winning probabilities of all types of falling roles are the same probability, but different winning probabilities may be obtained depending on the types of falling roles, and in this way, the type with the highest winning probability in the normal gaming state. By performing the stop operation in the winning combination procedure of the falling combination, the medal payout rate in the normal gaming state can be increased, and during RT (2), the stopping operation is performed by the avoidance procedure of the type of falling combination having a high winning probability. By performing the above, it is possible to increase the probability of avoiding termination of RT (2). That is, since the difference in the player's advantage depends on whether or not the player performs technical intervention, the interest can be enhanced.

  In addition, by placing the symbols that make up the falling combination beyond the drawing range, it is possible to avoid winning the falling combination by performing a reel stop operation at a timing outside the drawing range. A different reel stop order for avoiding winnings is determined for multiple falling combinations, and when any of the falling combinations wins, the winning determined according to the type of the falling combination is avoided. When a stop operation is performed in the order of stopping the reels for the purpose, control is performed so that the falling combination is missed, and if the stop operation is performed in a different order from the stop order of the reels to avoid the winning, The winning combination may be awarded, and in this way, it is possible to prevent the falling winning prize from being won by a relatively simple technical intervention. In this case, it is preferable that other small roles are elected at the same time as the fallen role, and when the fallen role is missed, the other small roles that are elected at the same time win the prize. Even if a fallen role is missed, a small role wins and a medal can be obtained.

  In the first embodiment, a slot machine for setting bets using medals and credits is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine for setting bets using game balls, It may be a full credit type slot machine that uses only credits to set the number of bets.

  Further, in addition to the medal insertion mechanism such as the flow path switching solenoid 30 and the insertion medal sensor 31, a ball take-in device that takes in a game ball, and a take-in ball that detects a game ball taken in by the ball take-in device In addition to a medal payout mechanism, such as a hopper motor 34b and a payout sensor 34c, a ball payout device for paying out game balls and a payout ball detection switch for detecting game balls payed out by the ball payout device It is possible to set a bet number using both medals and game balls and play a game, and the present invention may be applied to a slot machine in which medals and game balls are paid out by winning.

  Second Embodiment A slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), and RB, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is the initial gaming state, RT (5) (6). , RB.

  The initial gaming state is a gaming state other than RB and RT (5) (6), and after any BB is finished, after a setting change, after RT (5) is finished, RT (6) is finished. . RB is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  In this example, when any cherry wins in the initial game state (except for the state where any special role is elected), the special role (only when the special role is not carried over) and the small role The replay time (5) (5) is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (2) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the medal payout rate per game is less than 1. RT (5)). RT (5) won the specified number of games without winning any special role (in this example, 280 games when black cherry wins, 300 games when net cherry wins, white cherry wins) In this case, the game ends in 320 games) or wins any special role before reaching the prescribed number of games.

  In addition, when the RT transition outcome is derived on any winning line in the initial game state (except for the case where any special part is elected), the special part (when the special part is not carried over) Only) and the small role lottery probability is the same as the initial game state, but the replay (1) lottery probability is higher than the initial game state, and the payout rate of medals per game exceeds 1. (6) Control to (RT (6)). RT (6) reaches the specified number of games (100 games in this embodiment) without winning any special role, or wins any special role before reaching the specified number of games. It comes to end with.

  Note that RT (6) can be shifted only from the initial gaming state, and even if an RT shift outcome is derived on any winning line during RT (5), it shifts to RT (6). However, once RT (5) is controlled, RT (5) ends, and then RT (6) until an RT transition outcome is derived on any winning line in the initial gaming state. There is no transition to.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the initial gaming state (excluding the state in which any special role is won), that is, after the end of the BB, after the setting change, after the end of RT (5) or the end of RT (6) In a later gaming state, there is a possibility that both RT (5) in which an increase in medals cannot be expected and RT (6) in which an increase in medals can be expected. For this reason, once transitioning to RT (6) from the initial gaming state, an opportunity to transition to RT (6) again is provided even after RT (6) is completed, and RT (6) is periodically controlled. It becomes possible to do. On the other hand, when transitioning from the initial gaming state to RT (5), there is no transition to RT (6) until the end of the RT (5), but when RT (5) ends, the initial gaming state is entered again. Even in such a case, an opportunity to periodically shift to RT (6) will come. In other words, the initial gaming state functions as a chance zone that may shift to RT (6) where an increase in medals can be expected, and even if such a chance zone shifts to RT (5), it shifts to RT (6). Even if you do, you will visit periodically.

  As described above, in the slot machine of this embodiment, in the initial game state, RT (6) that is advantageous for a player who can expect an increase in medals by deriving an RT shift outcome on any winning line. ) On the other hand, if any of the cherries wins, an increase in medals cannot be expected, and the transition to RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player who does not transition to RT (6). there is a possibility. If any cherry wins in the initial gaming state, the game moves to RT (5), which is disadvantageous for the player. However, when RT (5) ends, the game moves to the initial gaming state again. For this reason, even if the transition to RT (5) is made without transitioning to RT (6) in the initial gaming state, the transition to the initial gaming state is performed again thereafter, so there is a possibility of transitioning to RT (6) periodically. The initial gaming state will come, and the player's expectation for RT (6) can be maintained.

  In addition, in the initial gaming state, there is a display mode that is derived on the condition that the RT transition starts on one of the winning lines, that is, the replay (2) is won and the reel stop control is performed by the automatic stop control. When derived, it is controlled to RT (6) which is advantageous to the player.

  For the transition to RT with transition to RT (6), it is necessary to wait until the automatic stop time elapses without performing the stop operation and to stop the reel by the automatic stop control. In addition, since the RT transition outcome is derived on the condition that the replay (2) is won, the player performs a stop operation in consideration of whether or not the replay (2) is won. It is possible to select whether to stop the reel or to stop the reel by automatic stop control without performing a stop operation, and the game can be sharpened.

  In addition, as described above, in order to win a small role or a re-gamer, it is necessary for the player to perform a stop operation, and if the automatic stop is always performed, the number of medals that can be obtained is smaller than when the stop operation is always performed. Therefore, it is important to select whether to stop the reel by performing a stop operation or to stop the reel by automatic stop control without performing the stop operation.

  In particular, in this embodiment, it is assumed that all the games are set to automatic stop control over the expected number of games until the replay (2) is won after the start of the initial gaming state, that is, no win is generated during this time. The winning probability of replay (2) in the initial gaming state is determined so that the number of medals consumed in the case of the game is greater than the number of medals that can be expected to increase when RT (6) is exhausted to the specified number In the initial gaming state, when the transition outcome notification is not made, even if the automatic stop control is selected until the RT transition outcome is derived, as a result, the automatic stop control is not selected and the transition to RT (6) is not performed. In the case of the slot machine, the automatic stop control is always selected in spite of the fact that the transition game is not notified in the initial gaming state because more medals can be obtained. Operation is adapted to be prevented from lowered more than necessary.

  In addition, if any cherry wins in the initial gaming state, the initial gaming state ends, but black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry can be avoided by automatically stopping without performing the stopping operation as described above. . As a result, by automatically stopping without performing the stop operation, even when any of the cherries is won, it can be avoided that these cherries win and the initial gaming state ends.

  Thus, if any of the cherries that will be the end condition is won by winning in the initial gaming state, the reel is stopped by the automatic stop control after waiting for the automatic stop time to elapse without performing the stop operation. Thus, it is possible to avoid the end of the initial gaming state. Therefore, the player stops the reel by performing a stop operation in consideration of whether any cherry is won in the initial game state, or stops the reel by automatic stop control without performing the stop operation. It is possible to select whether or not to make the game clearer.

  Further, as described above, in order to win a small role or a re-gamer, it is necessary for the player to perform a stop operation, and if the automatic game is always automatically stopped in the initial game state, the end of the initial game state is surely avoided. However, since the number of medals that can be earned will be reduced compared to the case where the stop operation is always performed, the reel is stopped by performing the stop operation, or the reel is stopped by the automatic stop control without performing the stop operation. The importance of choosing or becomes greater.

  In particular, in this embodiment, when the falling role type notification is not made in the initial gaming state, it is not possible to specify whether any cherry is winning, and appropriately select automatic stop control. As a result, more medals can be obtained when the automatic stop control is not selected, so that the automatic stop control is selected in spite of the fact that the type of falling combination is not notified in the initial gaming state. The operation is prevented from deteriorating more than necessary.

  In addition, since there is only one black cherry, net cherry and white cherry black cherry, black cherry, and white cherry symbols on the left reel. If a stop operation is not performed within the drawing range of 4 frames on the winning line where a combination of cherries, net cherries and white cherries can be arranged, it is possible to avoid a combination of black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. As a result, even if it is not automatic stop, even if any cherry is elected by performing the stop operation with the operation procedure that avoids the combination of black cherry, net cherry, white cherry It can be avoided that these cherries win and the initial gaming state ends.

  As a result, after the start of the initial gaming state, when the falling combination is elected, not only the automatic stop is selected, but also the operation procedure for avoiding the winning combination of the falling combination, that is, at the timing outside the pull-in combination range of the falling combination Even if the player performs a stop operation, that is, by the player's technical intervention, the initial gaming state can be continued, so that the interest associated with the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  On the other hand, for each area of the left reel, there is an area where the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol is drawn on one of the winning lines. There is no area where it is possible to avoid drawing the symbol, “net cherry” symbol or “white cherry” symbol on the winning line. In other words, there is no stop operation position on the winning line for any of the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, or “white cherry” symbol. ”And“ White Cherry ”symbols cannot be stopped on the winning line, so if one of the cherries is elected in the initial game state, it is impossible to intentionally remove the cherry if the type is not known. Yes, 2/3 chances of winning cherries will be missed, but if 1/3 chance of winning cherries wins and no special role is won, the initial gaming state will end Will be. As a result, the operating procedure for avoiding winnings varies depending on the type of fallen combination, and there is no common avoidance procedure for all types of fallen combinations. Thus, it is determined whether or not the initial gaming state is continued depending on whether or not it is hit, and the interest associated with the initial gaming state can be further enhanced.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to avoid the falling combination by the technical intervention of the player. However, when the falling combination is elected, if the stop operation is performed, the falling combination always wins. According to the configuration, that is, depending on the technical intervention of the player, the winning combination of the falling combination cannot be avoided and the winning of the falling combination can be avoided only when the automatic stop is selected.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a performs a transition outcome winning notification for notifying that when the replay (2) that can derive the RT transition outcome in the initial gaming state is won, In the initial game state, when a fallen combination (black cherry, net cherry, white cherry) is won, a fallen role type notification is made to notify the type of fallen winning combination (type of the falling role identified from the internal winning flag) It is like that.

  In this embodiment, as described above, even if the replay (2) is won, if the stop operation is performed to stop the reel, the RT transition outcome that triggers the transition to RT (6) cannot be derived. On the other hand, if automatic stop is always selected, no winning combination can be won, and medals will be reduced as compared to the case where the stop operation is performed. ) Will not cover the decrease in medals and will be meaningless.

  On the other hand, when the replay (2) is won in the initial gaming state, when the transition-out winning notification is executed, RT is determined by selecting that the replay (2) is won in the game, that is, automatic stop. It becomes possible to recognize that it is possible to derive the transition outcome, and it is possible to select the automatic stop only for the necessary game in the initial game state and derive the RT transition outcome to shift to RT (6). Become.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the transition-winning winning notification is executed on the condition that the notification winning flag is set and the notification execution lottery is won. However, when the notification winning flag is set, it may be executed without fail. Furthermore, when the number of notifications remains, the transition-out winning notification is configured to be performed. The number of times of transition to RT (6) may be varied.

  In this embodiment, if any cherries wins in the initial gaming state as described above, the initial gaming state is terminated, but as described above, the left reel that constitutes the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry. The “Black Cherry”, “Net Cherry”, and “White Cherry” designs cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, so if any cherry is won in the initial game state, the type is unknown. Otherwise, it is impossible to intentionally remove the cherries, and the winning cherries will be missed with a probability of 2/3, but the winning cherries will win with a probability of 1/3 and the initial gaming state will end. Will end up.

  Although you can avoid winning a cherry by selecting automatic stop, you cannot specify when a cherry is won. If you always select automatic stop, you can win any combination. Therefore, since the number of medals is reduced, it is meaningless even if the initial gaming state continues.

  On the other hand, in the initial game state, when any of the cherries wins, if the fallen role type notification is executed, the player is suggested by the notified color or pattern in addition to the winning of the fallen role. Depending on the color or pattern, it is possible to recognize which combination of black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries has been won. It is possible to specify a stop operation position at which the symbol, “net cherry” symbol and “white cherry” symbol are not intentionally stopped on the winning line.

  For this reason, when any cherry is won in the initial gaming state, the faller combination type notification is executed, so that the player can recognize the type of the selected cherry by the notified color or pattern. As a result, it is possible to know the operation procedure for avoiding winning of a cherry that may have been won, and the player intentionally misses the winning cherry, so that the player is in the initial gaming state accompanying the winning of cherry. It is possible to avoid the end and continue the initial gaming state.

  In addition, when a fallen combination type notification is executed, the stop operation is not performed, and automatic stop is selected, so that the winning of the falling combination can be avoided without performing the operation procedure for avoiding the winning of the falling combination. Can do. That is, the player can avoid the winning of the falling role by technical intervention according to his / her skill level, and can also avoid the winning of the falling role by selecting automatic stop.

  In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment described above, the falling combination type notification is executed on the condition that the notification winning flag is set and the notification execution lottery is won. If the notification winning flag is set, the falling role type notification is not necessarily executed, and the number of games in which the initial gaming state continues can be changed according to the winning probability of the notification execution lottery. However, when the number of notifications remains, the falling role type notification may be executed, and the number of games in which the initial gaming state continues may be changed according to the number of notifications.

  Further, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 91a sets the set value on the condition that the number of games digested has reached the specified number of games after the start of RT (5), which is disadvantageous to the player, that is, the end of RT (5). The suggestion is executed. Thus, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5), which is a disadvantageous state for the player and the player is likely to end the game, is ended.

  In this embodiment, an effect that suggests a set value is executed on the condition that RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, but after RT (5) is disadvantageous for the player, After a certain number of games have elapsed, an effect that suggests a set value may be executed at a higher rate than before, in which case the player is in a disadvantageous state and the player Even if RT (5) is likely to end the game, the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained up to a certain number of games, and then RT (5) ends. Since the number of games up to is less than that at the beginning of RT (5), the player's willingness to continue the game can be maintained until RT (5) ends.

  As described above, the second embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the second embodiment, and changes and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as the first embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment is also applicable to the second embodiment.

  In the second embodiment, the lottery probability of replay (2) is increased at RT (5). However, it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The lottery probability of 1) may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  In addition, the replay (1) lottery probability is increased in RT (6), but it is sufficient that at least the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) is increased. The probability may be increased, or the lottery probability of both replay (1) and replay (2) may be increased. Furthermore, although the lottery probability of one type of replay decreases, even if the lottery probability of the other type of replay increases, the combined probability of replay (1) and replay (2) increases as a result. good.

  A third embodiment of the slot machine to which the present invention is applied will be described. The configuration of the slot machine according to the present embodiment includes the same configuration as that of the first embodiment described above, and therefore, different points will be mainly described here.

  In the first embodiment described above, the gaming state is the normal gaming state, RT (1) to (4), and RB, whereas in this embodiment, the gaming state is from the normal gaming state, RT (7), and RB. Become.

  In the above-described first embodiment, the black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are paid out at the time of winning a prize (one to match the two winning lines). , Net cherries and white cherries are paid out at the time of winning 15 prizes.

  In the above-described first embodiment, when a special combination and a small combination are simultaneously won, priority is given to the control of aligning the special combination on the winning line over the small combination, and only when the special combination cannot be drawn However, in this embodiment, priority is given to the control of aligning the small roles on the winning line over the special roles, and the special roles are awarded only when the small roles cannot be drawn. Is possible.

  In this embodiment, when either BB (1) or BB (2) wins in the normal gaming state, the lottery probability of the small role is the same as in the normal gaming state, but replay (1) and replay (2 ) Is controlled to a replay time (7) (RT (7)) in which the synthetic probability is higher than the normal gaming state. RT (7) ends when the winning BB wins.

  The medal payout rate per game in RT (7) exceeds 1, and an increase in medals can be expected. However, black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry cannot simultaneously aim for the symbols that make up these roles. The substantial appearance rate is 1/3. Considering this, the actual medal payout rate per game in RT (7) is less than 1, and the medals decrease.

  The sub CPU 91a of the present embodiment, when either BB (1) or BB (2) wins, informs that BB has been won, and assists cherry type notification for notifying the type of cherry. A game number distribution lottery is performed in which the number of games controlled in time is selected from a plurality of different predetermined numbers of games.

  Then, the sub CPU 91a sets the number of games selected in the game number distribution lottery in the RAM 91c, and controls the assist time until the number of games is consumed, during which any of black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry is selected. When Kaga wins, a cherry type notification for notifying the type is executed.

  In addition, the sub CPU 91a performs lottery by lottery even when BB (1) or BB (2) is carried over and a watermelon or watermelon + 1 is won, and the selected game number remains in the RAM 91c. It is designed to add to the number. Also, in the game number distribution lottery at this time, there is a higher percentage of the number of games selected when watermelon + 1 is won than when watermelon is won, and the combination of “watermelon-watermelon-watermelon” It can be expected that the player who is aligned with the winning lines L1, L2, and L3 is more aligned with the winning lines L4 and L5.

  As with the fall type combination notification in Example 1, the cherry type notification is a color or pattern (black cherry) indicating that the black cherry has been won, the net cherry has been won, or the white cherry has been won. Black to indicate that it has won, shaded to indicate that net cherry has been won, and white to indicate that white cherry has been won) It is only necessary to inform the player of the type of cherries that have been won, suggesting the types of cherries that have been selected, the combination of the cherries themselves, the combination of symbols, and the types of cherries. A notification may be made by displaying an image or the like on the liquid crystal display 51, or a notification may be made by turning on a corresponding LED, outputting a corresponding sound, or the like. Furthermore, a symbol that is an index of a symbol that differs depending on the type of cherry (such as a symbol that is located near the symbol of the cherry and that stands out from the symbol of the cherry), an image that suggests the symbol, etc. Anyway.

  In this embodiment, the number of games is applied as the assist time end condition. However, the assist time end condition can be selected in various ways. For example, the winning of the winning special role, the number of games and the cherry type Number of notifications to be executed, number of cherry wins to reach a specified number, winning or winning a specific role, winning or winning a specific role to reach a specified number, winning a final lottery, etc. Is applicable. Further, the end condition may be changed during the assist time. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to end the assist time for each prescribed number of games, and the lottery is won by winning the lottery.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the “black cherry” symbol, “net cherry” symbol, and “white cherry” symbol of the left reel constituting black cherry, net cherry, and white cherry are intentionally stopped on the winning line. Since black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are won, it is impossible to deliberately win these black cherries, net cherries and white cherries. Although it is possible to win with a probability of 1/3, it will be missed with a probability of 2/3.

  On the other hand, in the assist time, when any of black cherry, net cherry, or white cherry is won, the cherry type notification is executed, so that the player is notified of the black cherry, It is possible to recognize which type of cherry is selected from among net cherry and white cherry, and the black reel, black cherry, net cherry, It is possible to specify the stop operation position where the “white cherry” symbol stops on the winning line, and it is possible to win all the winning cherries.

  Even before the end of the assist time, if the winning BB wins, the assist time will end at that point, but at the assist time, if neither the re-playing part nor the small part is won, that is, the winning part If the BB wins and the assist time ends when aiming at the BB configuration symbol, the fact that neither the re-playing role nor the small role has been won can be specified and notified. When the game is performed, the player can avoid the end of the assist time by performing a stop operation at a timing that is outside the drawing range of the winning BB configuration symbol. In addition, when it is notified that neither a re-playing role nor a small role is won at the assist time, an operation procedure for avoiding winning of the winning BB by selecting automatic stop without performing the stop operation is performed. BB winning can be avoided even if it is not performed. That is, the player can avoid the BB winning by technical intervention according to his / her skill level, and can also avoid the BB winning by selecting the automatic stop.

  In this embodiment, as described above, the actual payout rate of medals per game in RT (7) is less than 1 and the medals will decrease, but it was won by being controlled by the assist time. Since black cherries, net cherries, and white cherries can all be won, the payout rate of medals per game in this case exceeds 1.

  Therefore, when BB (1) or BB (2) is elected and controlled by RT (7), the medal will increase while being controlled by the assist time. It is possible to acquire more medals by continuing RT (7) without winning a prize. On the other hand, after the assist time is over, medals will decrease and BB lottery will not be performed. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to win the winning BB and finish RT (7). Become.

  As described above, in the slot machine of the present embodiment, when either BB (1) or BB (2) is won, it is controlled to RT (7) until the winning BB wins, and during RT (7) Can expect an increase in medals on condition that all of the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are awarded. That is, when either BB (1) or BB (2) is elected, it is controlled to RT (7) which is advantageous to the player, and RT (7) does not continue from BB. From (7) to BB, a gaming state advantageous to the player continues, so that the player's expectation can be increased step by step before being controlled by the BB.

  RT (7) can be expected to increase the number of medals on the condition that all the black cherries, net cherries and white cherries won as described above. However, the winning black cherries, net cherries and white cherries are expected. In order to win all the cherries, the left reel must be stopped at the timing of the “cherry” symbol pull-in range according to the color or pattern of the selected cherries. The black reel, black cherry, and white cherry symbols that make up the white cherry cannot be intentionally stopped on the winning line, so if you don't know the type of the winning cherry The winning cherries cannot be won reliably, and an increase in medals cannot be expected just by moving to RT (7).

  For this reason, in this embodiment, when BB (1) or BB (2) wins, not only the transition to RT (7) but also a lottery for lottery of games, When that cherry is won, it is controlled by the assist time when the cherry type notification indicating the type of the selected cherry is executed, so stop the operation with the color or pattern cherry notified by the cherry type notification aimed at the left reel. By doing so, it will be possible to win all the winning cherries. However, even though the type of cherry won by assist time will be informed, an increase in medals is not expected if the stop operation cannot be performed accordingly, and the player will be the first to perform technical intervention for the player. Since an advantageous gaming state can be achieved, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, RT (7) continues after either BB (1) or BB (2) wins until the winning BB wins, but the cherry type notification is executed during the assist time. After the assist time is over, cherry type notification is not executed even at RT (7), and technical intervention by the player is virtually impossible, and an increase in medals cannot be expected. Therefore, after the assist time is over, it is possible to prompt the player to win the winning BB immediately.

  As described above, the third embodiment of the present invention has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the third embodiment, and modifications and additions within the scope of the present invention are included in the present invention. Needless to say. Further, the same or similar configuration as in the first or second embodiment has the same effect as that described in the first or second embodiment. Further, the modified example illustrated for the first embodiment or the second embodiment can also be applied to the third embodiment.

1 Slot machine 2L, 2C, 2R Reel 7 Start switch 8L, 8C, 8R Stop switch 32L, 32C, 32R Reel motor 34 Hopper unit 35 Overflow tank 35a Full tank sensor 41 Main controller 41a CPU
41b ROM
41c RAM
91 Sub-control unit 91a CPU
91b ROM
91c RAM

Claims (1)

Provided with a variable display section on which a plurality of types of identification information each can be identified,
When the gaming value is used to set the number of bets, the variable display unit can be changed, and after changing the variable display unit, the display result is derived by stopping the change of the variable display unit. In a slot machine that can generate a prize according to the display result,
Before the display result is derived, multiple types of prizes including special prizes with transition to special gaming state, small prizes with game value addition, and re-game prizes with replay A pre-determining means for deciding whether or not to allow occurrence of
Derivation operation means operated by the player to derive the display result;
Derivation control means for performing control for deriving the display result according to a determination result of the prior determination means and an operation procedure of the derivation operation means;
Special decision carry-over means for carrying over the decision to allow the generation of the special prize after the next game when it is determined that the special prize is allowed to be generated and the special prize is not generated based on the determination. When,
Special gaming state control means for controlling to the special gaming state when a special display result for generating the special prize is derived as the display result;
Game value giving means for giving a predetermined number of game values to a player when a small combination display result in which the small combination winning is generated as the display result;
An operation procedure notifying means for notifying that an operation procedure advantageous to a player can be specified according to the specified result when the determination result of the prior determining means is a specified result that allows the occurrence of the small part winning. When,
A stepping motor for variably displaying the variable display unit by exciting in a predetermined order with respect to a plurality of excitation phases arranged so as to surround a rotor incorporating a permanent magnet;
Fluctuation control means for performing fluctuation control for variably displaying the variable display unit by exciting the plurality of excitation phases of the stepping motor in a predetermined order;
It has a storage area for storing data for controlling games including excitation phase data, which is data related to the excitation phase, so that it can be read and written, and even if power supply to the slot machine is stopped, Data storage means capable of holding stored data;
A setting value setting means for selecting and setting one of setting values from a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages for the player based on the operation of the setting operation means;
A setting time initialization means for initializing data stored in the data storage means when a new setting value is set by the setting value setting means based on an operation of the setting operation means;
A set value suggesting effect executing means capable of executing a set value suggesting effect indicating the set value set by the set value setting means;
With
The data storage means stores, in the storage area, data indicating a stop phase that is an excitation phase excited by the stepping motor when the variation of the variable display section stops.
The data initialized by the setting initialization means does not include the excitation phase data,
The fluctuation control means performs the fluctuation control based on the excitation phase data stored in the data storage means when the data storage means is initialized by the setting time initialization means,
In the state where the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is carried over by the special decision carry-over means, the occurrence of the replay prize is generated more than the state in which the decision to allow the occurrence of the special prize is not carried over The expected value of the number of gaming values given by the gaming value granting unit per game is notified when the operating procedure can be specified by the operating procedure reporting unit. When the derivation operation means is operated according to the operation procedure, the number is greater than the number of gaming values used for setting the bet amount, and when the operation procedure is not identifiable by the operation procedure notification means, Less than the number of gaming values used to set bets,
The set value suggesting effect includes a specific set value suggesting effect that is executed only when a specific set value is set.

Images